Version 2.1
Produced in Sept. 2000
Compact image sensor camera
IV-S30
User’s Manual (Introduction and Hardware)
< Controller >
-IV-S31M
-IV-S32M
-IV-S33M
Thank you for purchasing the SHARP IV-S30 compact image sensor camera. Read this introductory user's
manual carefully to thoroughly familiarize yourself with the functions and proper procedures for operation.
Store this user's manual in a safe place. We are confident that the manual will be helpful whenever you
encounter a problem.
In addition to this manual, there are two other IV-S30 manuals as follows. Read them in conjunction with this
manual.
IV-S30(IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
IV-S30(IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
Manual type
User’s Manual (Introduction and Hardware: This manual)
User’s Manual (Function and Operation)
Major subjects
How to use
- Outline of the IV-S30 (features and
- Become acquainted with the IV-S30
IV-S30
functions)
- Learn how to install the IV-S30 and
(IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
- Description of the hardware
wire it up
User's Manual
- Startup method
- Learn how to execute positioning and
(Introduction and
- Operation using the simplified menus existence inspections with simple
Hardware)
- General performance specifications.
setting operations.
- Detailed explanations of all the
- Learn how to specify measurement
IV-S30
measurement functions.
/inspection conditions, good or NG
(IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) - Operation using the standard menus.
judgment conditions, etc.
User's manual
- Details of inputting and outputting
- Lear how to connect a programmable
(Function and
data and communications with other
controller or personal computer.
Operation)
devices.
- Learn what to do if a problem occurs.
- Troubleshooting
Notes
- This manual was written with the utmost care. However, if you have any questions or
inquiries concerning the product, please feel free to contact our dealers or service agents.
- Copying all or part of this booklet is prohibited.
- The contents of this manual may be revised or modified for improvement without prior
notice.
Important
When you install the IV-S30 at an European site, use only equipment that complies with the
EMC standards. Take the steps described below using the specified cable and EMC core.
- Install a noise filter on the DC power source input lines.
- Use shielded wires for input/output lines.
- Install ferrite cores on input/output lines.
Safety Precautions
Read this user's manual and the attached documents carefully before installing, operating, or performing any
maintenance, in order to keep the machine working correctly. Make sure you understand all of the equipment
details, safety information, and cautions before using this machine. In this user's manual, the safety
precautions are divided into "Dangers" and "Cautions" as follows.
Danger
: Improper handling is likely to lead to death or serious injury.
Caution
: Improper handling may lead to injury or damage to equipment.
Even when only a
Caution is given, serious results may occur depending on the
circumstances. In all cases, important points are described. Be sure to follow the
advice given.
The following symbols are used to prohibit or explain required action.
: This means do not do what is described. For example, prohibited disassembly is shown as
: This means an action you must take. For example, a ground connection that must be made is
.
shown as
(1) Installation
Caution
- Use only in the environments specified in the rinstruction manual, or user's manual.
Electric shock, fire or malfunction may result if used in high temperature, high humidity,
dusty or corrosive environments, or if excessive vibration or impact occurs.
- Install the equipment only as described in the manual.
An improper installation may cause the equipment to fail, breakdown, or malfunction.
- Never leave wire cuttings or any other foreign matter lying about.
A fire, breakdown or malfunction may result from inappropriate objects left near the equipment.
(2) Wiring
Caution
- Do not connect any camera not specified by SHARP to the IV-S31M/S32M/S33M controller.
Connecting any other camera to the controller may damage the controller or the camera.
- Connect only to the specified power source.
Connection to the wrong power source may cause a fire.
- Wiring should be performed by a qualified electrician.
Improper wiring may lead to a fire, machine failure or electric shock.
(3) Use
Danger
- Don't touch the terminals while the power is turned ON or you may receive an electric shock.
- Assemble an external emergency stop circuit and interlock circuit (external to the IV-S30
compact image sensor camera). Otherwise a breakdown or damage to other equipment may
occur due to a problem with the IV-S30.
Caution
- Take special care to follow all safety guidelines if you are changing the parameters for the
operating conditions or performing an "enforced output," "run," or "stop" during operation.
Misoperation may damage the machine or cause an accident.
- Turn ON the power supplies in the specified sequence. Turning ON the supplies in the wrong
order may lead to a machine breakdown or cause an accident.
.
(4) Maintenance
Warning
- The IV-S32M/S33M controller contains a lithium battery. Do not expose the IV-S32M /
S33M directly to flames as the battery may explode and seriously injure people nearby.
Prohibit
- Don't disassemble or modify the camera.
Fires, breakdowns or malfunctions may occur, if the camera is disassembled.
Caution
- Turn OFF the power source before connecting or disconnecting the IV-S30.
If you don't, electric shocks, malfunctions or breakdowns may occur.
Chapter 1: Outline
Chapter 2: Precautions for Use
Chapter 3: System Configuration
Chapter 4: Part Names and Functions
Chapter 5: Connection and Installation Methods
Chapter 6: Setting and Operating Outlines
Chapter 7: Simplified Menu Operation
Chapter 8: Specifications
Chapter 9: Operation Examples
Glossary
Appendix
Alphabetical Index
Table of contents
Safety Precautions .........................................................................................................3
Chapter 1: Outline .......................................................................................... 1-1 to 1-11
1-1 Features ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-2 Controller ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-3 Measurement program ................................................................................................................ 1-7
[1] Positional deviation measurement ............................................................................................. 1-5
[2] Degree of match inspection ....................................................................................................... 1-6
[3] Lead inspection .......................................................................................................................... 1-6
[4] BGA/CSP inspection (IV-S32M/S33M) ...................................................................................... 1-7
[5] Area measurement by binary conversion ................................................................................... 1-7
[6] Object counting by binary conversion ........................................................................................ 1-8
[7] Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion .................................................................. 1-8
[8] Point measurements .................................................................................................................. 1-9
[9] Distance and angle measurement ............................................................................................. 1-9
[10] Multiple position meansurement (IV-S33M) ........................................................................... 1-10
[11] Multiple degree of match inspection (IV-S33M) ...................................................................... 1-11
Chapter 2: Precautions for Use ................................................................................ 2-1
(1) Installation ............................................................................................................................ 2-1
(2) Mounting ............................................................................................................................... 2-1
(3) Power source ....................................................................................................................... 2-1
(4) Measurement settings .......................................................................................................... 2-1
(5) Data saving .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
(6) Storing the devices ............................................................................................................... 2-1
(7) Maintenance ......................................................................................................................... 2-1
Chapter 3: System Configuration ............................................................................. 3-1
3-1 Basic system configuration .......................................................................................................... 3-1
[1] When the IV-S31M/S32M is used as the controller ................................................................... 3-1
[2] When the IV-S33M controller is used ......................................................................................... 3-2
3-2 System configuration examples .................................................................................................. 3-4
[1] System configuration example for measurement triggered by an external trigger,
such as a photo sensor ............................................................................................................. 3-4
(1) When IV-S30 is used in a stand-alone mode ....................................................................... 3-4
(2) When a programmable controller is connected .................................................................... 3-4
(3) When a personal computer is connected ............................................................................. 3-5
[2] System configuration example for measurement triggered by the internal CCD sensor trigger 3-5
(1) When IV-S30 is used in a stand-alone mode ....................................................................... 3-5
(2) When a programmable controller is connected .................................................................... 3-6
(3) When a personal computer is connected ............................................................................. 3-6
[3] System configuration example for measurement triggered by a command from a personal
computer .................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Chapter 4: Part Names and Functions ........................................................... 4-1 to 4-7
4-1 Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) ............................................................................................... 4-1
4-2 Camera ........................................................................................................................................ 4-2
[1] Camera ...................................................................................................................................... 4-2
(1) Standard camera (IV-S30C1) ............................................................................................... 4-2
(2) Micro camera (IV-S30C2) ..................................................................................................... 4-2
(3) High-speed camera (IV-S30C3) ........................................................................................... 4-3
(4) Micro, high-speed camera (IV-S30C4) ................................................................................. 4-3
[2] IV-S30EA1 camera converter .................................................................................................... 4-4
[3] Camera lens (IV-S20L16) .......................................................................................................... 4-6
[4] Camera cable (IV-S30KC3/KC5/KC7) ....................................................................................... 4-6
4-3 Remote keypad (IV-S30RK1) ...................................................................................................... 4-7
Chapter 5: Connection and Installation Methods ....................................... 5-1 to 5-37
5-1 Installation conditions ................................................................................................................. 5-1
[1] Lighting equipment ..................................................................................................................... 5-1
[2] Illuminance and shutter speed ................................................................................................... 5-3
[3] Optimum lens and resolution ..................................................................................................... 5-4
5-2 Installing, connecting and wiring the IV-S31M/S32M/S33M controller ....................................... 5-11
[1] Connecting equipment to the controller .................................................................................... 5-11
[2] Installation ................................................................................................................................ 5-13
[3] Connecting a power supply ...................................................................................................... 5-15
[4] Connecting to the input/output terminals (parallel I/F) ............................................................. 5-16
(1) Input terminals (INPUT) X0 to X7 ....................................................................................... 5-17
(2) Output terminals (OUTPUT) Y0 to Y7 and READY ........................................................... 5-19
(3) I/O port ............................................................................................................................... 5-19
(4) Wiring to the controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) ................................................................. 5-19
[5] Connection for communications with personal computer (general purpose serial I/F) ............ 5-20
(1) When communicating through the RS-232C port ............................................................... 5-20
(2) When communicating through the RS-422 ........................................................................ 5-21
[6] Connecting a programmable controller using the computer link function ................................ 5-22
5-3 Installing and connecting the IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4 camera ....................................................... 5-23
[1] Installing and connecting the IV-S30C1/C3 ............................................................................. 5-23
(1) Connections ....................................................................................................................... 5-23
(2) Installing the camera body ................................................................................................. 5-24
[2] Installing and connecting the IV-S30C2/C4 ............................................................................. 5-27
(1) Connections ....................................................................................................................... 5-27
(2) Installation of the camera head .......................................................................................... 5-29
(3) Installation of the camera body .......................................................................................... 5-30
5-4 Installing, connecting, and wiring the IV-S30EA1 camera converter ......................................... 5-32
[1] Connection to the IV-S33M controller ...................................................................................... 5-32
[2] Connection to an EIA camera .................................................................................................. 5-53
(1) Cameras that can be connected ........................................................................................ 5-33
(2) Connecting between the IV-S30EA1 and an EIA camera .................................................. 5-33
[3] Installing the IV-S30EA1 .......................................................................................................... 5-34
(1) Installation procedures ....................................................................................................... 5-34
(2) Installation example ............................................................................................................ 5-36
[4] Wiring of the IV-S30EA1 .......................................................................................................... 5-37
Chapter 6: Setting and Operating Outlines ................................................... 6-1 to 6-9
6-1 Setting and operating procedures ................................................................................................ 6-1
6-2 Standard menus and simplified menus ........................................................................................ 6-2
[1] Menu configuration .................................................................................................................... 6-3
(1) Standard menu configuration ............................................................................................... 6-3
(2) Simplified menu configuration (positioning) .......................................................................... 6-3
(3) Simplified menu configuration (existence inspection) .......................................................... 6-3
[2] Method for selecting the menu configuration ............................................................................. 6-4
(1) When power is first turned ON after the machine is delivered ............................................. 6-4
(2) Changing the screen from the standard menus to the simplified menus configuration ........ 6-5
(3) Changing from the simplified menus to the standard menus configuration .......................... 6-5
6-3 Power on setting menu ................................................................................................................ 6-6
[1] Operations menu lock ................................................................................................................ 6-6
[2] Change the Japanese or English display mode......................................................................... 6-6
6-4 Camera setting ............................................................................................................................ 6-7
[1] For the IV-S31M/S32M .............................................................................................................. 6-7
[2] For the IV-S33M ......................................................................................................................... 6-7
Chapter 7: Simplified Menu Operation ......................................................... 7-1 to 7-32
7-1 Operation screen ......................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-2 Image display ............................................................................................................................... 7-4
[1] Image display modes ................................................................................................................. 7-4
[2] Adjustment of image brightness ................................................................................................. 7-4
[3] Changing cameras ..................................................................................................................... 7-5
7-3 Setting functions that are different with each controller ............................................................... 7-5
7-4 Setting procedures ....................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-5 Setting the operation conditions .................................................................................................. 7-7
[1] Image capture ............................................................................................................................ 7-7
[2] Message display ........................................................................................................................ 7-8
[3] Pattern display ........................................................................................................................... 7-9
[4] Binary image display ................................................................................................................ 7-10
7-6 Setting object types .................................................................................................................... 7-11
7-7 Setting the shutter speed ........................................................................................................... 7-12
7-8 Setting the positioning conditions .............................................................................................. 7-13
[1] Setting the measurement conditions ........................................................................................ 7-14
[2] Setting the position evaluation conditions ................................................................................ 7-17
7-9 Setting the existence inspection conditions ............................................................................... 7-18
[1] Setting the measurement conditions ........................................................................................ 7-19
[2] Setting the evaluation conditions ............................................................................................. 7-22
[3] Setting the measurement conditions for correcting a position ................................................. 7-23
[4] Setting the evaluation conditions for correcting a position ....................................................... 7-24
7-10 Measurement triggering ........................................................................................................... 7-25
[1] Trigger measurement ............................................................................................................... 7-25
(1) Using the TRG/BRT key ..................................................................................................... 7-25
(2) Triggered by an input terminal ............................................................................................ 7-25
(3) Triggered by a message on the general-purpose serial communication port ..................... 7-26
[2] Result output ............................................................................................................................ 7-26
(1) Output on the output terminals ........................................................................................... 7-26
(2) Output over the general-purpose serial communication port ............................................. 7-26
(3) Output using a programmable controller computer link ...................................................... 7-26
7-11 Saving data .............................................................................................................................. 7-26
7-12 Specify the system conditions .................................................................................................
[1] Communication setting ............................................................................................................
[2] Specify the computer link conditions ........................................................................................
[3] Initialization ..............................................................................................................................
[4] Self-diagnosis ..........................................................................................................................
(1) Diagnostic items and methods ...........................................................................................
(2) Operating procedure ..........................................................................................................
[5] Setting the system time (IV-S32M/S33M) ................................................................................
[6] Camera setting (IV-S33M) .......................................................................................................
7-27
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-30
7-31
Chapter 8: Specifications ................................................................................ 8-1 to 8-8
8-1 Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) ...............................................................................................
8-2 Camera specifications .................................................................................................................
[1] Camera (IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4) ...................................................................................................
[2] Camera converter (IV-S30EA1) .................................................................................................
[3] Camera lens (IV-S20L16) ..........................................................................................................
[4] Camera cable: IV-S30KC3/S30KC5/S30KC7 ............................................................................
8-3 Support tools ................................................................................................................................
[1] Monochrome monitor IV-09MT ..................................................................................................
[2] LED lighting equipment IV-60LD specifications .........................................................................
8-1
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-6
8-7
8-7
8-8
Chapter 9: Operation Examples .................................................................... 9-1 to 9-21
9-1 Simplified menu ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
[1] Positioning measurement .......................................................................................................... 9-2
[2] Existence inspection .................................................................................................................. 9-6
9-2 Standard menu .......................................................................................................................... 9-10
[1] Area measurement by binary conversion ................................................................................. 9-10
[2] Positional deviation measurement ........................................................................................... 9-15
Glossary ............................................................................................... Glossary-1 to 12
Appendix ............................................................................................... Appendix-1 to 2
Alphabetical Index ................................................................ Alphabetical Index-1 to 3
Outline
Chapter 1: Outline
This compact image sensor camera system, the IV-S30 (using the IV-S33M controller), dramatically
reduces overall processing time, thanks to a camera with double and quadruple speeds, SHARP’s
partial-image capture function, and a high-speed gray search function. It will not only contribute to highspeed, high-efficiency inspection and measurement processes, but it will also help you keep your
prices competitive.
1-1 Features
It is now possible to inspect every item in a production run, thanks to highspeed processing
High-speed camera offers double and quadruple speeds. SHARP’s unique partial-image capture
function and high-speed gray search function provide higher overall speed. This system can inspect
approximately 5,000 * pieces per minute (using the IV-S33M controller). Such high speed makes it
possible to inspect all the chips or parts in a production lot.
Conventional model (IV-S20)
Approx. 28 ms
Total
processing
time: Approx.
40 ms
Approx. 12 ms
IV-S33M
Approx.
3 ms
Approx.
9 ms
Total
processing
time: Approx.
12 ms
Approximately
5,000 pieces/minute
Image capture
Image processing
* The total processing times above are true when the measurement conditions are: a 64 x 64
model; a 160 x 160 search, contraction is set to 3; the shutter speed is 1 ms; and a partial
image that is 33% of the total image area is specified.
The camera diameter is only 17 mm, so it can be installed in a very limited space.
The IV-S30C2/C4 camera is capable of capturing images at 4 times the speed of the standard camera,
progressive scanning, and it uses a square grid. It is as small as your thumb. It can be installed in
virtually any tiny space in even the smallest machines.
Conventional EIA (data) cameras can be used with the controller
The IV-S33M controller can connect two EIA specification cameras using a converter. Just by replacing
the controller in the image processing section, you can achieve high-speed processing at decreased
cost.
Controller
(IV-S33M)
EIA cameras
Converter
(IV-S30EA1)(commercially available)
Simple and speedy setting makes for easy setups
No need to create a measuring program. You just set the measuring conditions using the remote
keypad. In addition, the IV-S33M can automatically set the binary conversion threshold value and
evaluation conditions by just pressing the SET key.
NG displays and data are transferred quickly, for truly useful NG handling
The IV-S33M can check an NG image and a part’s NG history while measuring. Using the USB
communication bus, NG images can be transferred to a personal computer in less than 7 seconds. The
causes of NG products can be fed back to the design section, leading to quick improvements in the
quality of your products.
Customize to your own specification
An IV-S30LB1 image processing library and IV-S30SP parameter setting support software are both
available. Using these tools, the menu screen can be modified to suit your specialized needs to create
your own unique image processing system.
1-1
1
Outline
• High-speed processing now possible using a high-speed camera and a partial-image
capture function
1
The IV-S30 (with the IV-S33M controller) can use double and quad-speed cameras that employ progressive type CCDs. Using SHARP’s unique, partial-image capture function, the IV-S30 offers very highspeed image capturing. By selecting the best of five image capturing modes to match your inspection and
measurement conditions, this system helps reduce the processing time even further.
Full-image, full-line mode
Partial-image, half-line mode
Scan every line in the whole image
Scan half of the lines in just the specified area
IV-S31M/32M/33M + standard camera
IV-S33M + hight-speed camera
IV-S33M + hight-speed camera
Note
Full-image, half-line mode
Partial-image, full-line mode and background half line mode
Scan half of the lines in the whole image
Scan every line in part of the image and scan
half of the lines in the rest.
IV-S33M + hight-speed camera
IV-S33M + hight-speed camera
Partial-image, full-line mode
Scan every line in the whole image
IV-S31M/32M/33M + standard camera
IV-S33M + hight-speed camera
Note
* The Partial-image modes are available when scanning 240 out of 480 vertical lines.
* Standard camera: IV-S30C1/C2, High-speed camera: IV-S30C3/C4
* Full-line mode: Scan odd and even lines. Half-line mode: Scan only the odd lines.
Note: The scan time will vary with the position of the partial image to scan. (In the cases given above,
there is a maximum of 0.4 ms of difference.)
• Our high-precision gray search is also high speed
We normalize images to a 256 grayscale standard, and perform a high-precision gray search by detecting features in sub-pixel units.
The IV-S30 can shorten this process using 9 ms high-speed processing * (IV-S33M)
Gray search time
Conventional model Approx. 37 ms
(IV-S20)
IV-S31M
Approx. 18 ms
IV-S32M
Approx. 12 ms
IV-S33M
Approx.
9 ms
* When the search area is 256 x 256 pixels, the model is 64 x 64 pixels, and contraction is to set
3.
• Shorten the cycle time by connecting two cameras
The IV-S33M can be simultaneously connected to two IV-S30C3/C4 high-speed cameras or two IVS30C1/C2 standard cameras. By connecting two cameras, your system can reduce the processing time
by positioning two areas at the same time, and then inspecting two areas at the same time. By triggering
the cameras at the same time, the system can capture two images, and display the images above and
below each other, or left and right.
* Combined use of a high-speed camera and a standard camera is not possible.
1-2
Outline
• You can cut your camera costs by using your current camera (IV-S33M)
Two, commercially available EIA cameras can be connected using an IV-S33EA1 special converter. This
means that you can use your current EIA cameras the same as before, and just replace your image
processing section with the IV-S33M. Installation and adjustment of lighting, camera, and lenses is easy
and can cut your costs.
• CCD trigger function does not need an external sensor
After a trigger window is setup, the IV-S30 does not need an external sensor if it is scanning moving
objects. To set up a trigger, you can select from binary image conversion, average density, and gray
search techniques. The gray search mode is useful for a workpiece for which you cannot easily establish
the density range.
* The gray search trigger function is only available on the IV-S33M.
Feed direction
CCD trigger
• Shutter speed freely set
The shutter speed can be set anywhere between 1/30 and 1/10000 second for each object type. Practically, this means that the light level can be adjusted without changing the lighting equipment for each
object type. The random shutter function is used to close the shutter when a trigger event is detected, so
that precise still images of moving objects can be scanned.
• Easily and automatically set threshold value and judgement criteria (IV-S33M)
Using the SET key, the IV-S33M can automatically set the threshold values (binary conversion, density
difference, and edge width), that used to be set by entering numbers manually. To determine the upper
and lower limits of the OK and NG criteria, you only need to measure an OK workpiece. Therefore, you no
longer need to rely on skill, or experience to make accurate measurements at high speed.
• Automatic search reference images (IV-S33M)
The controller automatically searches for the maximum contrast area within the measurement area, and
detects it virtually instantly. Mistake-free work can now be performed quickly.
* This can be used for mis-collation checks of printed matters.
• Simple measurements of position, detection of the same workpiece and counting quantities (IV-S33M)
By using the degree of match inspection functions for multiple workpieces and position measurement for
multiple workpieces, the controller can detect up to 128 workpieces in one image that meet or exceed a
specified degree of match with the reference image. The controller can count quantities and measure the
positions of workpieces that have complicated structures of light levels and are difficult to convert to
binary images.
• Effective when checking for angular deviation, very good as a robotic eye
The controller can detect objects turned through a full 360˚ of orientation. It can inspect printing at great
angles off the main axis, and can be used in robotic inspection machines.
• CE approval applied for, widely accepted in international markets
The reliability of the IV-S30 means that it can be used in units destined for overseas markets.
• Integrated measuring programs allow the controller to be used for inspection and measurement immediately
Simple operations on the remote keypad let you select the desired measuring program to suit your application. Since there is no need to develop measuring programs, this unit is easy set up and you can start
measuring products the same day you receive it.
- Various measuring programs
Positional deviation measurement, degree of match inspection, distance and angle
measurement, lead inspection, area measurement by binary conversion, counting by binary
conversion, label measurement by binary conversion, point measurement, BGA/CSP
inspection*1, multiple position measurement*2, and multiple degree of match inspection*2.
*1 IV-S32M/S33M only, *2 IV-S33M only.
1-3
1
Outline
• Measure a large number of object types: the IV-S30 can register up to 64 object types
1
The IV-S30 can keep track of more than one set of measurement conditions. The shape of an object, its
position and your desired measurements are all programmable. Therefore, it can be used on a production line that produces multiple, slightly or greatly different models.
(IV-S33M: Maximum 64 items, IV-S32M: Maximum 32 items, IV-S31M: Maximum 16 items)
• Integrated micro PC function
The IV-S30 has a micro PC function that allows it to determine unknown values by calculating the inspected and measured results and then output signals to lamps and plungers. You can construct a
complete, simple inspection process with a single controller.
• Displays and transfers NG images while measurements are being made (IV-S32M/S33M)
The IV-S33M can check an NG image history (up to 128 images) while measuring, or simultaneously
display a measured image and an NG image by splitting the screen. While measuring, the controller can
send NG images over the USB bus (12 Mbps) to a personal computer at high speed (approximately 7
seconds per image). Since you can collect and analyze NG images in real time, the NG rate can be
decreased by finding the cause and making corrections immediately.
(The IV-S32M can display NG images when measurements are stopped.)
Measurement conditions
Monitor display
Workpiece
Display measured image
Displays switchable
according to the measurement conditions
High-speed data transfer
to a personal computer
Display NG images
Up to 128 NG
images can be
stored
Split-screen display
1-4
Outline
1-2 Controller
[1] Software version of the controllers
This manual describes the controllers (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) and their respective software versions
below.
Controller
Software version
IV-S31M
V2.02
IV-S32M
V2.02
IV-S33M
V1.01
[2] Differences between types of controllers
The controller models (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) have the following specifications.
Item
IV-S31M IV-S32M IV-S33M
Number of object types handled
16
32
64
Maximum number of reference images/
300/3
600/8
600/8
total number of images
Gray search time*
18 ms
12 ms
9 ms
Standard camera (IV-S30C1)
Micro camera (IV-S30C2)
Connecting High-speed camera (IV-S30C3)
M
i
c
r
o
,
h
i
g
h
s
p
e
e
d
c
a
m
e
r
a
(
I
V
camera
S30C4)
EIA camera (commercially
available)
Split display of two camera images on the
left and right sides of the screen
Number of NG images that can be stored
(Maximum 128 images)
Calendar/timer
BGA/CSP inspection
X1 to X4 X1 to X5 X1 to X6
Input terminal Object type be changed
block
External input
X5 to X7
X6, X7
X7
Power consumption
7W
7W
7W
(" ": Compatible/available, "-": Not compatible/unavailable)
* The gray search times given above are true when the search area is 256 x 256 pixels, the
model is 64 x 64 pixels, and the contraction value is set to 3.
For other specifications, see pages 8-1 to 8-3 in “Chapter 8: Specifications.”
[3] Upgrade details
(1) IV-S33M
This manual describes the IV-S33M using software version V1.01.
The upgrade details (functions added to version V1.00) for the IV-S33M software (system program)
are as follows.
Newly added functions in software version V1.01 (compared with V1.00)
Item
Added function
"NO (NG measurement display)" has been added on the "2HALT
Halt on NG measurement
ON NG MEAS" line in the "OBJECT TYPE SYS." menu.
When the MONITOR OUTPUT is set to "CAM1&2", the screen
NG image display screen displays the camera number (Camera 1: C1, Camera 2: C2) next to
the measurement display screen.
On the setting screen, a strobe output is now available when
Strobe output
switching from a dynamic image to a static image. ("6STROBE
OUT" on [I/O CONDITIONS]
For details about using the added functions (standard menu), see the “IV-S30 (IV-S31M/S32M/
S33M) User’s Manual, Function and Operation”
1-5
1
Outline
1
(2) IV-S31M/S32M
This manual describes the IV-S31M/S32M using software version V2.02.
The upgrade details (functions added to version V1.15) for the IV-S31M/S32M software (system
program) are as follows.
Newly added functions in software version V2.02 (compared with V1.15)
Item
Added function
NG image display function added. Therefore, the "1DISP NG IMAGE"
line (display NG images) on the [OBJECT TYPE SYS.] menu is deleted.
NG image (IV-S32M only)
Added "NG-IMG-INIT" (initialize NG images) on the "4INITIALIZATION"
line of the [SYSTEM COND] menu.
Added "YES (GRAY SRC)" on the "1TRIG CCD START " line of the
CCD trigger
[OBJECT TYPE I/O] menu.
Added "MULTI-POSI" and "MULTI MATCHES" for use as the
Measurement program
measurement programs.
Added the "4MATCHING (AVG-GRAYS, DIFF. ABS)" line on the [MEAS
Light level inspection
COND] menu.
<Degree of match inspection, multiple degree of match inspection>
Added "CONTRAST SR" to the "REF IMG AREA" choices on the [Gray
search] menu.
Contrast search
<Positional deviation measurement, degree of match inspection,
multiple position measurement, multiple degree of match inspection>
Added the "2SELECT CAMERA (CAM1&2, CAM1&NG-IMG)" line on the
Use camera setting
[TYPE MEAS COND] menu.
Added an "AUTO. REGI" (automatic registration) choice on the [Edge
Automatic light level
detection] menu.
difference and edge width
<Positional deviation measurement, lead inspection, multiple
detection
position measurement>
Added an "AUTO REGIST" choice on the [Binary area cond] menu.
Automatic threshold value
<BGA/CSP inspection (IV-S32M), area measurement by binary
setting
conversion, object counting by binary conversion, object identification
(labeling) by binary conversion>
Added "MANUAL" to the "1MASK SET" line on the [BINARY IMG
Binary mask
MASK] menu.
- Added a polygonal window setting.
Object identification
Added "MID-PNT " (middle point) to the "BINARY CHARACTER" choices
(labeling) by binary
on the [MEAS COND] menu.
conversion
Added "CONDITION SET" on the [EVALUATION COND] menu.
Evaluation condition
<All measurement programs>
- Added "FUNCTION (SUM, AVG, REG) " on the [NUMERIC CALC]
menu.
Numerical calculation
- Increased the number of digits below the decimal from 2 to 4, for the
upper and lower value settings on the [NUMERIC CALC] menu.
<All measurement programs>
Made it possible to display a reference image using the number
previously registered on the [Gray search] menu.
Reference image
<Positional deviation measurement, degree of match inspection,
multiple position deviation measurement, multiple degree of match
inspection>
Added the "0EXTENSION FUNC. 2 (crosshair cursor display)" line on
Extension function
the [TYPE RUN COND].
Made it possible to set the correction registration in two stages
Positional correction
- Added (0 to 1) on the "1MODE" line on the [POSITION
CORRECT] menu.
Window group move
Added the "7MOVE ALL WINDOW" line on the [OBJECT TYPE SYS.]
Added the "4ANGLE UNIT" line on the [MEAS COND] menu of the
Rotation angle unit
positional deviation measurement.
For details about the added functions (standard menu), see the “IV-S30 (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) User’s
Manual, Function and Operation”
1-6
Outline
1-3 Measurement program
The IV-S30 integrates the following eight measurement programs: Positional deviation,degree of match
inspection, lead inspection, BGA/CSP inspection (IV-S32M/S33M), area measurement by binary
conversion, object counting by binary conversion, object identification (labeling) measurements by binary
conversion, multiple position measurement (IV-S33M), multiple degree of match inspection, point
measurements and distance and angle measurement. You can select operating condition parameters to
suit your application of the IV-S30.
[1] Positional deviation measurement
Purpose
The gray scale search function makes it possible to measure positional deviation as
well as the absolute position.
- It is also possible to detect the position of sub-pixel units with great accuracy.
- A rotation angle of 360° can be detected. (When a one point gray search is selected).
Application Used to determine the position of machine parts and substrates.
[Determining the location of the positioning (the fiducial mark) mark that
identifies the position of the substrate]
(1) 1 point search: Detecting the deviation in position in X and Y directions
Reference image: Center coordinates (X1,Y1)
Inspection Image: Center coordinates (X2,Y2)
[Measured result]
Center coordinates: (X2,Y2)
Amount of deviation: X2-X1, Y2-Y1
Y2-Y1
Search area
X2-X1
(2) 2 point search: Determining positional deviation in X and Y directions as well
as rotational deviation
Reference image a: Center coordinates (Xa1,Ya1)
Inspection image a: Center coordinates (Xa2,Ya2)
Reference image b: Center coordinates (Xb1,Yb1)
Example
Ya2-Ya1
Inspection image b: Center coordinates (Xb2,Yb2)
θ
Search area
(image a)
Yb2-Yb1
Xa2-Xa1
Anglar deviation: θ
Xb2-Xb1 Search area (image b)
[Measured result]
- Center coordinates of image a: (Xa2,Ya2)
- Amount of deviation of image a: Xa2-Xa1, Ya2-Ya1
- Center coordinates of image b: (Xb2,Yb2)
- Amount of deviation of image b: Xb2-Xb1, Yb2-Yb1
- Deviation angle: θ
- The deviation angle θ, determined in the 2-point search, is used to readjust the
rotation of the image for measurements 1 to 4.
1-7
1
Outline
[2] Degree of match inspection
Compare a good criterion image to a test image by inspecting matching levels using the
gray scale search function. (Determine whether the part is acceptable or NG by checking
similarities between the criterion image and the workpiece (test) image.)
A matching level comparison using binary images is also possible.
Detect positional deviation of labels, detect contamination of different parts, inspect the
Appli- mounting of electronic parts on PC boards, detect mis-prints, inspect for missing electric
cation
parts such as terminals, and simple letter inspection.
[Detecting label deviations on packages]
Search area
for positioning
Search area
for positioning
Criterion image
for positioning
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S30
Criterion image
for positioning
SERIAL NO.
8F053G26
MODEL
IV-S30
Example
Criterion image
for measuring object
Criterion image
for measuring object
▲Good label
▲NG label
[Measured results]
- Degree of match compared with the reference image
- Detected coordinates (X/Y) of the measurement image.
- Light level in the measured image (average light level/absolute value of difference)
- Inspection procedure
1 Conduct a gray scale search of the criterion image position
2 Correct the position of the object being measured from the coordinates for the
criterion image obtained in item 1 above.
3 If the matching level of the test image is low, the IV-S30 can determine that the
label position is NG.
[3] Lead inspection
Purpose
Based on positional information obtained from the gray scale search function, inspect the
condition of the IC leads and connector pins. (No. of lead pins that can be detected in one
image: Max. 128.)
Application
Inspect the IC leads and connector pins
[Inspect the layout of the IC leads and connector pins]
K1
K2
L3
K0
D2
D1
L1
D0
L2
Lead measurement limit line
Lead
L0
1
Purpose
K3
Reference line
Example
W0
W1
W2
[Lead inspection]
- Number of leads K
- D0 to D2: Distance
between leads
- W0 to W3: Lead width
- L0 to L3: Lead length
W3
- Inspection procedure
1 Determine the measurement points (K0 to K3) from the mid points of the leads and
the reference line.
2 Calculate the distances between the leads (D0 to D2) using the measurement points.
3 Calculate the lead lengths (L0 to L3) from the measurement points (K0 to K3) toward
the lead measurement limit line.
4 Calculate the lead widths (W0 to W3) centering the measurement points.
1-8
Outline
[4] BGA/CSP inspection (IV-S32M/S33M)
Purpose
Measure the center of gravity, area of each object, number of objects, and fillet diameter
using the object identification function after binary conversion.
1
AppliInspecting BGA/CSP solder balls.
cation
[Measurement of 6 balls]
Object 0
Object 1
Object 2
[Measured results]
- Number of objects: K
- Area of each object: R0 to R127
- Distance between centers of gravity:
(DX0, DY0) to (DX127, DY127)
- Fillet diameters: FX, FY
Example
Object 3
Object 4
Object 5
- Inspection procedure
Image
capture
Binary
conversion
Area of each
object
Measure centers
of gravity
Object identification
(numbering)
Fillet diameters
Ball size
Distance between centers
of gravity for pairs of balls
Distance between balls
Number of balls
[5] Area measurement by binary conversion
Purpose
Detect the existence/absence and size of a workpiece when “the workpiece is one point”
or “measurement position is fixed."
- Convert the specified pixel area to binary values and measure the size of the white
area.
Check for the existence of bearings inserted by a bearing insert machine, prevent conAppli- tamination of different parts in automobile production lines, determine the type of watercation proof caps, check for the existence/absence of bottle labels, inspect the cuircuit traces on
PWBs, check for the presence of grease, check for existence of frozen foods.
[Measured result]
- Workpiece area
Workpiece
Example
- Inspection procedure
Capture image
Convert to binary values
1-9
Measure (area)
Outline
[6] Object counting by binary conversion
1
Purpose
Checks the number of objects (max. 3000 pcs.) when there is more than one object in an
image arranged arbitrary.
- When the specified pixel field has been converted to a binary image, the white areas
are measured or identified as separate objects and counted.
Application
Counting pieces of food or parts
Example
[Measured result]
- Number of workpieces/total area
size
Workpiece
- Inspection procedure
Convert to binary values
Capture image
Measure (quantity, total area size)
[7] Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion
Purpose
When there are several objects and the measuring position is arbitrary, the presence or
absence of objects and the size of the objects can be determined.
- The specified pixel area is converted to a binary image. The number of objects, total size
of the white area (the objects) and the area, center of gravity, main axis angle, fillet
diameter, center point, and circumference of each white area can be measured.
Application
Counting the number of food products or parts, measuring the sloped angle or center of
gravity of parts, and measuring the size of food products.
[Measurement of 6 objects]
No.1
No.2
No.3
Objects
No.4
No.5
No.6
Example
[Measured result]
- Object identification (numbering),
number of objects present, total
area.
- Center point (IV-S33M only),area,
center of gravity, main axis angle,
fillet diameter, circumference, and
center point of each object. - Inspection procedure
Image capture
Convert to binary values
Object identification (numbering)
Measurement (area, gravity center, main axis angle,
fillet diameter, circumference, and center point)
1-10
Outline
[8] Point measurements
Purpose
The presence or absence of target objects is examined.
- A simple black or white evaluation is made in the specified pixel area of binary
images.
- The light level in the specified pixel area is averaged, and a decision is made
whether or not it is within the specified lightness range in gray scale images.
Checking the presence or absence of packed parts, inspecting the working
Applications condition of LEDs or fluorescent character display tubes, and sorting household
electric appliances.
[Inspection at 6 points]
Number of points (max.)
: 128 points at average light levels
256 points in binary images
Point size: 2 m x 2n pixels
(m, n = 1 to 16)
Example
- Inspection procedures
Image capture
Binary
conversion
Black/white evaluation
of points
Average light
level
Light level evaluation
of points
[9] Distance and angle measurement
Purpose
Application
Measure the distance and angle of two points using the center detection function in a gray
scale search and the edge detection function, as well as center of gravity detection by
functions.
- This function can measure the following distances and angles: distance between two points,
X coordinate distance, Y coordinate distance, the angle between three points, the horizontal
angle of two points, and the vertical angle of two points.
- The following points and lines can be set: center point, circle center point, gravity center,
point where two straight lines cross, line passing through two points.
Measurement of mounted electronic parts
[Measuring IC packages]
Criterion image a
Search area
(criterion image b)
Example
Search area
(criterion image a)
Criterion image b
Register criterion image a and b by matching edges of the IC package.
- Measurement procedures
1 Find the center points of criterion images a and b using a 2-point gray scale search.
2 Determine the distance between the two center points.
1-11
1
Outline
[10] Multiple position measurement (IV-S33M)
1
The IV-S33M can detect up to 128 workpieces whose images exceed the specified
matching level (gray search) or threshold value (edge detection) compared with the
reference image.
Purpose - The positional deviation measurement needs to have a number of positions registered for
measurement. However, this measurement only requires you to register one position and
reduces the set up time.
Applica- Measure the position of workpieces with a complicated light level that cannot be converted
into binary images.
tion
● Gray search
Reference image
Four workpieces
detected
[Measured results]
- Number of images detected
- Coordinates and degree of match detected for each image
● Edge detection
Example
[Measured results]
- Number of points detected
- Coordinates detected for each points
L1
L2
L3
This is useful for obtaining the distance between the coordinates of a position.
- L1 to L3 can be calculated by measuring distances and angles.
1-12
Outline
[11] Multiple degree of match inspection (IV-S33M)
Using the gray search function, the IV-S33M can detect up to 128 workpieces whose
Purpose captured image exceeds the required degree of match with the reference image.
Applica- Inspect (or count) workpieces that have complicated light levels and cannot be converted
into binary images
tion
Reference image
Four workpieces
detected
Example
[Measured results]
- Number of images detected
- Degree of match, density (average/absolute difference), and detected coordinates
1-13
1
Precautions for Use
Chapter 2: Precautions for Use
Pay attention to the points below when handling the IV-S30.
(1) Installation
- Each device in the IV-S30 system must be installed in an environment as specified in this manual.
(Operating ambient temperature: 0 to 45˚C, operating ambient humidity: 35 to 85%RH (noncondensing.))
- Do not install the devices in the following locations. Installation in any of these locations may cause
electrical shock, fire, or malfunction of the devices.
1. Places exposed to direct sunlight
2. Places with exposed to corrosive gases
3. Places with excessive amounts of dust, salt, or metal powder in the air.
4. Places exposed to water
(2) Mounting
Make sure to tighten the mounting and terminal screws securely and check everything before
supplying power. A loose screw may cause faulty operation.
(3) Power source
- Do not use the IV-S30 (power supply for the controller) power supply with any other equipment.
- Do not turn OFF the power while the menu is displayed or while communicating with external
equipment. Turning OFF the power may erase the data settings.
(4) Measurement settings
Make sure to specify 4000 ms (4 seconds) or less for the measurement processing time on each
measurement item (MEASUREMENT 0 CAMERA 1, MEASUREMENT 0 CAMERA 2, and
MEASUREMENT 1 to 4). For example, if the various tasks require 7000 ms of measurement
processing time, assign 3500 ms to MEASUREMENT 1 and 3500 ms to MEASUREMENT 2 so that
each of the assigned processing times is less than 4000 ms.
If the measurement processing time exceeds 4000 ms, the IV-S31M/S32M/S33M assumes that an
abnormal operation has occurred and may try to reset the system.
(5) Data saving
- The data set by using the remote keypad is temporarily stored in the memory (RAM) of the IV-S30.
However, it is not stored in the flash memory yet. Therefore, make sure to save the data settings
before returning to the operation screen from any condition settings menu by pressing the SET
key. If you do not save the data, the data will disappear when you turn OFF the power to the IVS30 controller.
- We recommend that you save the data settings and reference images on a floppy diskette using
the IV-S30SP parameter setting support software for the IV-S30.
(6) Storing the devices
Do not put any object on top of any of the devices, or the device may malfunction.
(7) Maintenance
Be careful not to get any dirt or stains on the CCD surface or camera lens. This may cause mis
measurement.
2-1
2
System Configuration
Chapter 3: System Configuration
3-1 Basic system configuration
[1] When the IV-S31M/S32M is used as the controller
Monitor
Personal
computer
Input/output
IV-09MT etc.
With either an EIA or
NTSC compatible video input terminals
Conversion
connector
(Accessory for the
IV-S31M/S32M)
・Programmable controller
・Limit switch
・Warning lamp, etc.
Parallel I/F
3
Programmable controller
Serial I/F
Parameter setting
support software for
the IV-S30:
IV-S30SP
USB
RS232C
RS422
Monitor cable
(Accessory for the
IV-S31M/S32M)
Power
supply
(24 VDC)
Controller
(IV-S31M/S32M)
Remote key pad
(IV-S30RK1)
Camera cable
IV-S30KC3
IV-S30KC5
IV-S30KC7
LED lighting
equipment
(IV-60LD)
Camera Camera lens
(IV-S30C2) (IV-S20L16)
Camera cable
IV-S30KC3
IV-S30KC5
IV-S30KC7
Micro camera
(IV-S30C2)
φ17lens
(purchase)
- A maximum of two cameras can be connected to the IV-S31M/S32M.
- An IV-S20C1 camera (for the IV-S20) also can be connected using a camera conversion cable
(IV-S30HC).
Product lines
Item name
Camera
Model name Specification or details
Standard
IV-S30C1
Camera main housing (without lens or camera cable)
Micro
IV-S30C2
Camera main housing (without lens or camera cable)
Camera cable
IV-S30KC3 Cable for IV-S30C1/C2 camera, 3 m
IV-S30KC5 Cable for IV-S30C1/C2 camera, 5 m
IV-S30KC7 Cable for IV-S30C1/C2 camera, 7 m
Camera lens
IV-S20L16
C mount lens with a 16 mm focal length
Remote keypad
IV-S30RK1 Keys for remote entry
Parameter setting support
IV-S30SP Runs on Windows95/98/NT4.0
software
Image processing library
IV-S30LB1 Runs on Windows95/98/NT4.0
Monochrome monitor
IV-09MT
Monochrome 9 inch monitor
LED lighting equipment
IV-60LD
Integrated light source and controller in one housing
- For details about the IV-S30SP, IV-S30LB1, IV-09MT, and IV-60LD, see the individual instruction
manuals.
3-1
System Configuration
[2] When the IV-S33M controller is used
Monitor
Personal
computer
Input/output
IV-09MT etc.
With either an EIA or
NTSC compatible video input terminals
3
Conversion
connector
(Accessory for the
IV-S31M/S32M)
・Programmable controller
・Limit switch
・Warning lamp, etc.
Parallel I/F
Programmable controller
Parameter setting
support software for
the IV-S30:
IV-S30SP
Serial I/F
USB
RS232C
RS422
Monitor cable
(Accessory for the
IV-S31M/S32M)
Power
supply
(24 VDC)
Monitor cable
(Accessory for the
IV-S33M)
Remote key pad
(IV-S30RK1)
Camera cable
IV-S30KC3
IV-S30KC5
IV-S30KC7
Camera cable
IV-S30KC3
IV-S30KC5
LED lighting
equipment
(IV-60LD)
High-speed
camera
(IV-S30C3)
Camera cable
IV-S30KC3
IV-S30KC5
IV-S30KC7
Camera lens
(IV-S20L16,etc)
Micro camera
(IV-S30C2)
Camera cable
IV-S30KC3
IV-S30KC5
Micro, high-speed camera
(IV-S30C4)
φ17 lens
(purchase)
φ17 lens
(purchase)
CAMERA2
FG
0V
+24V
POWER
IV-S30EA1
1
CAMERA1
CONTROLLER
2
Main housing cable
(IV-S30EA1 accessory)
Camera lens
(IV-S20L16,etc)
Camera
(IV-S30C1)
Camera converter
(IV-S30EA1)
EIA camera
(Maximum of two -commercially available)
- A maximum of two cameras of the same type can be connected to the IV-S33M.
- Mixed use of different camera types (IV-S30C1/C2, IV-S30C3/C4, and EIA cameras) is not
supported.
- The IV-S30KC7 camera cable cannot be used with the IV-S30C3/C4 high-speed camera.
- The IV-S20C1 camera for the IV-S20 can also be connected using a camera conversion cable
(IV-S30HC).
3-2
System Configuration
Product lines
Item name
Standard
Micro
Camera
High-speed
Micro, highspeed camera
Camera converter
Camera cable
Camera lens
Remote keypad
Parameter setting support
software
Image processing library
Monochrome monitor
LED lighting equipment
Model name
Specification or details
IV-S30C1
Camera main housing (without lens or camera cable)
IV-S30C2
Camera main housing (without lens or camera cable)
IV-S30C3
Camera main housing (without lens or camera cable)
IV-S30C4
Camera main housing (without lens or camera cable)
IV-S30KC3
IV-S30KC5
IV-S30KC7
IV-S20L16
IV-S30RK1
Connect up to two EIA cameras (commercially
available)
Cable for IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4 camera, 3 m
Cable for IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4 camera, 5 m
Cable for IV-S30C1/C2 camera, 7 m
C mount lens with a 16 mm focal length
Keys for remote entry
IV-S30SP
Runs on Windows95/98/NT4.0
IV-S30LB1
IV-09MT
IV-60LD
Runs on Windows95/98/NT4.0
Monochrome 9 inch monitor
Integrated light source and controller in one housing
IV-S30EA1
- For details about the IV-S30SP, IV-S30LB1, IV-09MT, and IV-60LD, see the individual instruction
manuals.
3-3
3
System Configuration
3-2 System configuration examples
This section outlines the system configurations for measurement using an external trigger, such as
measurement using a photo sensor, measurement using CCD trigger, and measurement triggered by a
command from a personal computer.
See "Setting the Input/Output Conditions" in the IV-S30 User’s Manual (function and operation).
[1] System configuration example for measurement triggered by an external
trigger, such as a photo sensor
Camera 1 (image)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
Remote key pad
CAMERA1
VIDEO
USB
RS232C/RS422
CAMERA2
REMOTE
Controller
POWER
OUTPUT
Y1
X0
Y2
X1
Y3
X2
Y4
X3
Y5
X4
Y6
X5
Y7
X6
READY COM
0V
COM +24V
X7
IV-S3*M
INPUT
Power supply (24 VDC)
Warning lamp etc.
Y0
External trigger
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor, etc.)
Object type selection switch
External
output
(2) When a programmable controller is connected
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by an external trigger (a photo sensor or proximity sensor), and the
measurement data is output to a programmable controller. The object type number is selected
by the programmable controller.
Camera 1 (image)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
Remote key pad
Data (computer link)
VIDEO
CAMERA1
USB
RS232C/RS422
CAMERA2
REMOTE
Controller
POWER
OUTPUT
Y2
X1
Y3
X2
Y4
X3
Y5
X4
INPUT
Y6
X5
Y7
X6
READY COM
X7
0V
COM +24V
IV-S3*M
3-4
Y1
Object type selection
(parallel I/F)
X0
Programmable
controller
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Y0
3
(1) When IV-S30 is used in a stand-alone mode
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by an external trigger (a photo sensor or proximity sensor), and the
measurement result is output externally (warning lamp). The object type number is selected by
an external switch.
External trigger
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor, etc.)
System Configuration
(3) When a personal computer is connected
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by an external trigger (a photo sensor or proximity sensor etc.), and the
measurement data is output to a personal computer. The object type number is selected by the
personal computer.
Camera 1 (image)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
3
Personal computer
Object type selection,
data
CAMERA1
VIDEO
USB
RS232C/RS422
CAMERA2
REMOTE
Controller
POWER
OUTPUT
Y0
Y1
X0
Y2
X1
Y3
X2
Y4
X3
Y5
X4
Y6
X5
Y7
X6
READY COM
0V
COM +24V
X7
IV-S3*M
INPUT
Power supply
(24 VDC)
External trigger
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor etc.)
[2] System configuration example for measurement triggered by the internal CCD
sensor trigger
The internal CCD trigger can be used with camera 1, but with camera 2.
(1) When IV-S30 is used in a stand-alone mode
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by a CCD trigger, and the measurement result is output externally
(warning lamp etc.). In this case, sampling operation is automatically started.
Camera 1 (image + CCD trigger)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
Remote key pad
CAMERA1
USB
RS232C/RS422
CAMERA2
REMOTE
POWER
OUTPUT
Y2
X1
Y3
X2
Y4
X3
Y5
X4
Y6
X5
Y7
X6
READY COM
X7
0V
COM +24V
IV-S3*M
INPUT
3-5
Y1
External
output
X0
Warning lamp etc.
Y0
Power supply (24 VDC)
VIDEO
Controller
System Configuration
(2) When a programmable controller is connected
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by a CCD trigger (sampling start input: a photo sensor etc.), and the
measurement data is output to a programmable controller. The object type number is selected by the
programmable controller.
Camera 1 (image + CCD trigger)
Camera 2 (image)
Monitor
3
Data (computer link)
VIDEO
CAMERA1
USB
RS232C/RS422
CAMERA2
Remote key pad
REMOTE
Controller
POWER
OUTPUT
Y0
Y1
X0
Y2
X1
Y3
X2
Y4
X3
Y5
X4
Y6
X5
Y7
X6
READY COM
X7
0V
COM +24V
INPUT
IV-S3*M
Programmable
controller
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Start sampling input
(a photo sensor or proximity
sensor etc.)
Object type selsection
(parallel I/F)
(3) When a personal computer is connected
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by a CCD trigger (sampling start input: personal computer), and the
measurement data is output to a personal computer. The object type number is selected by the
personal computer.
Camera 1 (image + CCD trigger)
Camera 2 (image)
Start sampling input
Object type selection, data
CAMERA1
USB
RS232C/RS422
CAMERA2
REMOTE
Controller
POWER
OUTPUT
Y1
X0
Y2
X1
Y3
X2
Y4
X3
Y5
X4
INPUT
Y6
X5
Y7
X6
READY COM
X7
0V
COM +24V
IV-S3*M
3-6
Y0
Power supply
(24 VDC)
VIDEO
Personal
computer
Monitor
System Configuration
[3] System configuration example for measurement triggered by a command from a
personal computer
- Purpose/application
Measurement is started by a trigger from a personal computer, and the measurement data is output
to the personal computer. The object type number is selected by the personal computer.
Camera 1 (image)
Camera 2 (image)
3
Personal computer
Command, response
Monitor
Remote key pad
CAMERA1
USB
RS232C/RS422
CAMERA2
REMOTE
POWER
OUTPUT
Y1
X0
Y2
X1
Y3
X2
Y4
X3
Y5
X4
Y6
X5
Y7
X6
READY COM
X7
0V
COM +24V
IV-S3*M
INPUT
3-7
Y0
Power supply (24 VDC)
VIDEO
Controller
Part Names and Functions
Chapter 4: Part Names and Functions
This section describes the names and functions of the controller, camera (camera lens, camera converter,
camera body and camera cable), and the remote keypad which comprise the IV-S30 system. See section in
Chapter 5 "Connection and Installation Methods" for details about the housing brackets, camera angle bracket
and conversion connector.
9 Frame ground terminal
4-1 Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
2 Power terminal block
1 I/O terminal block
S*.** mark
(software version *.**)
INPUT
X0
Controller (front)
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
OUTPUT
0V
IV-S3*M
POWER
3 Power lamp (POWER)
VIDEO
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
0 Communication connector (USB)
42
Controller (side)
4 Monitor connector (VIDEO)
8 Remote key pad connector
(REMOTE)
5 Camera 1 connector (CAMERA1)
7 Communication connector
(RS232C/RS422)
6 Camera 2 connector (CAMERA2)
Name
I/O terminal block
INPUT: X0 to X7, C (+)
1 OUTPUT: Y0 to Y7,
READY, C (-)
2 Power terminal block
(+24V, 0V)
3 Power lamp (POWER)
Monitor connector
4 (VIDEO)
Camera 1 connector
5
(CAMERA1)
6 Camera 2 connector
(CAMERA2)
Communication connector
7 (RS232C/RS422: 9-pin, Dsub,female, rock screw
Remote key pad connector
8 (REMOTE)
Function
This block has 8 input terminals and 9 output terminals.
- External devices are connected to these terminals for input and
output (parallel I/F). - See page 5-17.
Commercially available constant-voltage power supply (24 V DC ±
10%, 500 mA or more) is connected here. - See page 5-15.
When the power is applied to the controller, the green lamp will light.
A monitor is connected here.
- The monitor connector is an RCA jack.
The camera cable connector is connected here.
- The camera connected to the CAMERA 1 position is camera 1,
and the camera connected to the CAMERA 2 position is camera 2.
This connector is used to connect a personal computer for communications (general purpose serial I/F) or to connect a programmable
controller for a computer link. - See page 5-20
The remote key pad connector is used to make selections from the
menues on the screen (to set parameters). It is connected here.
Be sure to ground the housing frame ground terminal together with
the frame ground of the constant-voltage power supply in accordance with class 3 grounding procedures. -See page 5-15.
This connector is used to connect a cable to a USB port on a person0 Communication connector al computer.
(USB)
- The USB port only functions with Windows 98.
9 Frame ground terminal
4-1
4
Part Names and Functions
4-2 Camera
[1] Camera
(1) Standard camera (IV-S30C1)
Lock screw (for securing the lens holder)
2 Cable connector
CCD section
⇒A
1 Lens holder
Front view (view A) of the CCD
Name
Function
1
Lens holder
The holder is used to make fine adjustment to the distance (back plane focus) between the CCD section and camera lens using a focus fixed lens.
(The distance has been adjusted before shipment. Usually, it does not
need to be adjusted.)
- To adjust it, loosen the upper lock screw, and turn the lens holder counter-clockwise. The maximum allowable distance is 1.5 mm.
2
Cable
connector
4
Connect this connector to the camera cable (IV-S30KC3/S30KC5
/S30KC7).
- To connect an IV-S30C1 camera, use the IV-S31M/S32M/S33M controller and camera cable shown
above.
(2) Micro camera (IV-S30C2)
2 Camera body
1 Camera head
Head cable
CCD section
φ
17
m
Cable connector
Cable length: 1 m
Camera head
installation section
Name
m
Lens mount section
(M 15.5 x 0.5 mm)
Function
Install a (commercially available) lens.
- The maximum external diameter of the camera head is φ17 mm,
and the one for lens mount is M 15.5 x 0.5 mm.
Connect to the camera connector of the camera cable (IV-S30KC3/
2 Camera body
KC5/KC7).
- To connect an IV-S30C2 camera, use the IV-S31M/S32M/S33M controller and camera cable shown
above.
1 Camera head
4-2
Part Names and Functions
(3) High-speed camera (IV-S30C3)
Lock screw (for securing the lens holder)
2 Cable connector
CCD section
⇒A
1 Lens holder
Front view (view A) of the CCD
Name
Function
1
Lens holder
The holder is used to make fine adjustment to the distance (back plane focus) between the CCD section and camera lens using a focus fixed lens.
(The distance has been adjusted before shipment. Usually, it does not
need to be adjusted.)
- To adjust it, loosen the upper lock screw, and turn the lens holder counter-clockwise. The maximum allowable distance is 1.5 mm.
2
Cable
connector
Connect this connector to the camera cable (IV-S30KC3/S30KC5
/S30KC7).
Note: This cable cannot be used to connect the IV-S30KC7.
- To connect an IV-S30C3 camera, use the IV-S33M controller and camera cable shown above.
Do not connect to the IV-S31M/S32M.
(4) Micro, high-speed camera (IV-S30C4)
2 Camera body
Head cable
1 Camera head
CCD section
φ
17
m
Cable connector
Cable length: 1 m
Camera head
installation section
Name
1 Camera head
2 Camera body
m
Lens mount section
(M 15.5 x 0.5 mm)
Function
Install a (commercially available) lens.
- The maximum external diameter of the camera head is φ17 mm, and
the one for lens mount is M 15.5 x 0.5 mm.
Connect to the camera connector of the camera cable (IV- S30KC3/
KC5/KC7).
Note: This cable cannot be used to connect the IV-S30KC7.
- To connect an IV-S30C4 camera, use the IV-S33M controller and camera cable shown above.
Do not connect to the IV-S31M/S32M.
4-3
4
Part Names and Functions
[2] IV-S30EA1 camera converter
2 EIA camera connector 2: CAMERA2
1 EIA camera connector 1: CAMERA1
CAMERA2
6 Frame ground terminal
(FG)
EXT
IV-S30EA1
POWER
+24V
MODE
5 Power terminals
(+24 V, 0 V)
0V
FG
INT
4
CAMERA1
3 Mode switch: MODE
7 Power indicator:
POWER
CONTROLLER
4Controller connector:
CONTROLLER
Name
EIA camera connector
1 1: CAMERA1
EIA camera connector
2 2: CAMERA2
3 Mode switch: MODE
Controller connector:
4 CONTROLLER
Power terminals
5 (+24 V, 0 V)
Frame ground terminal
6 (FG)
Power indicator:
7 POWER
Function
Connect an EIA camera (commercially available). Any camera
connected to CAMERA1 will be camera 1, and any camera
connected to CAMERA2 will be camera 2.
Note: Do not connect SHARP's special IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4
camera.
Select the camera synchronization mode from EXT and INT.
Use a thin pointed object such as a ballpoint pen.
- EXT = Lets you use an EIA camera with an externally
synchronized mode (a synchronizing signal is sent from
the IV-S33M to the EIA camera).
- INT = Lets you use an EIA camera with an internally
synchronized mode.
Connect to the main housing cable (supplied with the IV-S30EIA,
see the next page)
Connect to any commercially available constant voltage DC
power supply (24 VDC±10%, 500 mA or more)
This terminal is commoned with the enclosure. When the EIA
camera is connected to the controller using a shielded cable, the
EIA camera housing will be electrically connected to this
terminal.
When power is supplied to the IV-S30EA1, this lamp will light
green.
- To connect the IV-S30EA1 to the IV-S33M controller, use the cable supplied with the IV-S30 (see the
next page).
The IV-S30EA1 cannot be connected to the IV-S31M/S32M controller.
4-4
Part Names and Functions
Cable to connect the converter to the controller (supplied with the IV-S30EA1)
2 CAMERA 2 connector
3 Converter connector
2
1
1 CAMERA1 connector
Name
Function
1 Camera 1 connector Connect to the CAMERA 1 and CAMERA 2 connectors on the IVS33M controller.
2 Camera 2 connector
Converter connection
Connect to the controller side connector on the IV-S30EA1.
3 connector
4-5
4
Part Names and Functions
[3] Camera lens (IV-S20L16)
1 Focus
C
0.05m
Lock knob 2 (for fixing the focus)
1. 6
focus
∞
TV LENS 1:1.6 16mm
Lock knob 1 (for fixing the iris)
2 Iris
5.5 mm
(Movable range for focus adjustment)
Name
4
1 Focus
2 Iris
Function
To focus an image
-The focall enght (distance from an object) is 50 mm to infinity (from the front
of lens).
To adjust the image brightness.
-The iris a perture can be set from 1.6mm to closed.
[4] Camera cable (IV-S30KC3/KC5/KC7)
1 Camera connector
(Threaded type)
2 Controller connector
(Quick-connect type)
Cable length
IV-S30KC3: 3 m
IV-S30KC5: 5 m
IV-S30KC7: 7 m
Name
Function
1
Camera
connector
Connect to a connector of camera cable (IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4).
Note: The IV-S30KC7 cannot be connected to the IV-S30C3/C4.
2
Controller
connector
Connect to camera 1 connector or camera 2 connector of the controller
(IV-S31M/S32M/S33M).
4-6
Part Names and Functions
4-3 Remote keypad (IV-S30RK1)
Connector
- Connected to the controller
(IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
Cable length 3 m
4 Image change key (SEL)
1 Direction keys
(up, down, left and right)
5 Measurement start/brightness
select key (TRG/BRT)
2 Set (select) key (SET)
Dimensions (mm)
130 (W) × 61 (D) × 22.5 (H)
Key name
*
Direction keys
1
(up, down, left
and right)
3 Cancel key (ESC)
Function
Description
Selecting an item on a
menu screen
Setting a window
Select an item with the up, down, left and right
keys.
Set each coordinate.
- Select a digit or an item with the left and right
keys, and then specify a value with the up and
down keys.
- Specify a value with the up, down, right and left
keys.
Setting a value
Determine a highlighted
item
Set
(select)
key
2
(SET)
Determine the setting
value
Returning a setting to its
original state before beCancel key
ing changed
3
(ESC)
Returning to the previous
menu
Switch the image mode between through and
freeze on a setting screen. (See the preceding
Switching the image
page.) When the mode is switched from
Image change mode between the
through to freeze, a new image is captured.
4 key (SEL)
through mode and freeze Note: The run screen is only displayed in the
mode
freeze mode, and the "GAIN/OFFSET"
screen is only displayed in the through
mode.
Start measurement input
Measurement
start/brightness
5
select key
Switching the brightness
(TRG/BRT)
level (H and L)
Press this key on the run screen, and a new
measurement is triggered.
Change the displayed image brightness.
- Use this key when the image is so bright that
characters are difficult to see.
- The brightness can be changed on any
screen other than the run screen.
* The direction keys have an auto-repeat function.
4-7
4
Connection and Installation Methods
Chapter 5: Connection and Installation Methods
5-1 Installation conditions
[1] Lighting equipment
Lighting for the workpieces is an important factor in image processing. The lighting conditions affect the
measurement results. Select the proper lighting equipment.
- Make sure there is uniform illumination of the whole measurement field where object images will be
taken.
- Use flicker-free lighting equipment, such as a high frequency fluorescent lamps or halogen lamps.
- Consult us about the right lighting equipment for your application.
(1) Backlighting
Light should uniformly illuminate the field behind an object, so that the IV-S30 measure the object
with it's shadow. Since the shadow picture will be converted to binary values, reliable measurements
can be executed.
5
Example:
IV-S30C1
or similar
Backlighting equipment
Light
Conveyor
Inspection of a processed part
IV-S30C1
or similar
Light
Miss-processed
product
Linear feeder
Hole inspection
Backlighting using
surface illuminance LED
(2) Reflective lighting
A light shone on the front of an object with angle will be reflected, and the IV-S30 will pick up the
reflected light. If too much light is reflected, such as from a metallic surface or similar materials, a
proper image may not be obtained.
Example:
IV-S30C1
or similar
Label
Light beam
Light beam
IV-S30C1
or similar
Light beam
Measurement of the center
coordinates of a hole
Label detection
5-1
Connection and Installation Methods
When using the IV-60LD
This paragraph describes how to use Sharp IV-60LD LED lighting equipment. For details about the
installation and wiring of the IV-60LD, see the instruction manual.
The distance between the IV-60LD and an object (distance at which to install lighting equipment) should
be approximately 150 mm, and the lit area is approximately 50 mm ¥ 50 mm.
If the lighting distance is reduced approximately 60 mm, the lighting may be uneven.
77.3mm
IV-S30 camera
- View A
Light area
Camera center
Camera center
50mm
Workpiece surface
(Object to be
measured)
A
Lighting distance : 150mm
IV-60LD body
(Lighting section)
50mm
5
87mm
Camera angle bracket
When the light is projected from above the object and if reflection off the object influences the image
processing, try the following countermeasures.
1Tilt the camera center axis (within a range that does not affect the image processing) to move away
from the light reflected from the object.
IV-S30 camera
IV-60LD body
Reflected light
Workpiece surface
(Object to be
measured)
2Separate the camera from the lighting equipment. Install the IV-60LD lighting equipment so that it will
shines from an angle that prevents creation of the reflection.
- One light
- Two lights
IV-S30 camera
IV-S30 camera
IV-60LD body
5-2
IV-60LD body
IV-60LD body
Connection and Installation Methods
[2] Illuminance and shutter speed
The illuminance provided by the lighting equipment and the shutter speed must be set within the proper
range.
- The following graph shows the relation between illuminance and shutter speed for the IV-S20L16
camera lens (focal length 16 mm) with an aperture setting of f = 1.6.
Determine the proper amount of illuminance and the correct shutter speed, by referring to this graph.
Adjust the aperture as necessary.
- To measure a moving object, or to increase the image processing speed, set the shutter speed to 1/
1000 sec. or 1/2000 sec. or faster. However, an extremely high shutter speed will require intense
lighting, thereby increasing the cost.
Relation between illuminance and shutter speed [IV-S20L16 camera lens
(focal length 16 mm) with an aperture setting of f = 1.6]
Illuminance (lux)
5
32000
16000
Proper range
(shaded zone)
8000
4000
2000
1000
500
250
125
1/30
1/60
1/125
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
1/4000 1/10000
Shutter speed sec.
Note
- The standard relationship between illuminance and shutter speed is given above for
reference. When actually installing the equipment, make sure the proper combination is used
for the actual system.
5-3
Connection and Installation Methods
[3] Optimum lens and resolution
The optimum lens for your system can be selected, based on the camera installation distance and the
field of view (workpiece size).
• When the IV-S30C1/C3 camera is used
Vertical direction
Rounded surface of camera body
View (mm)
Horizontal direction
IV-S30C1/C3
(Horiz
on
directio tal
n)
Lens
Vertical direction
Workpiece
5
Workpiece
Camera installation
distance (mm)
Lens holder
Lens
Close-up shot ring
• When the IV-S30C2/C4 camera is used
IV-S30C2/C4 camera head
Lens
(commercially available)
View (mm)
Vertical
direction
A dented side is the
vertical (upper)
direction.
Workpiece
Workpiece
(Horiz
ont
directio al
n)
Vertical direction
Horizontal
direction
Camera installation
distance (mm)
Lens rear end
Lens
(commercially available)
IV-S30C2/C4
5-4
Dented part
Connection and Installation Methods
There is a relationships as shown on page 5-7 to page 5-9, among the camera installation distance, the
field of view (in the vertical/horizontal direction), the lens focal length f, the aperture setting, the focal
length, and the resolution.
[Example]
When the IV-S30C1/C3 camera is used, the camera installation distance is 500 mm, and the field of
view (in the horizontal direction) is 110 mm, the optimum lens can be selected as described in the
following procedure. The required information is taken from the table on page 5-7.
Camera
installation
distance
(mm)
Lens focal length f=16mm
View
(mm)
Vertical
Focal Resolength lution
Hori- (mm)
zontal
1
(µm)
2
450
96.3
102.8
16.6 200.7
500
107.4
114.6
16.5 223.9
600
129.6
138.3
16.4 270.1
3
1 Selecting the lens focal length f
Follow the line for a camera installation distance of 500 mm for the view (in the horizontal
direction) that is closest to 110 mm, which is 114.6 mm. A 114.6 mm field of view is shown in the
column for a lens focal length f, of 16 mm. Therefore, a lens with focal length of 16 mm is
considered to be optimum.
2 Considering the focal length
The actual focal length, 16.5 mm, is longer than the lens focal length, f = 16 mm, by 0.5 mm.
However, if the camera installation distance of 500 mm is within the focal range (distance from an
object) of the actual lens (f = 16 mm), you can use it.
1. The focus range of the IV-S20L16 camera lens (f = 16 mm) built into the controller is from 50
mm to infinity. Therefore, the camera installation distance of 500 mm is within the focal range,
and the IV-S20L16 lens can be used.
2. When another lens (with a focal range of 16 mm) is used, if its focal range exceeds 500 mm,
install a commercially available C mount close-up shot ring. Use a ring that is 0.5 mm thick
(16.5 - 16 = 0.5 mm).
3 Resolution
When the displayed image fills the whole monitor screen, and the view (in the horizontal direction)
is 114.6 mm wide, the resolution is 223.9 µm.
114.6mm
223.9 µm
512(pixelcount)
See "Glossary" for the diefinition of resolution.
Notes
- The values shown in the tables on page 5-7 to 5-9 are only reference data for installation.
These values may vary, according to the characteristics of lenses you are using. When using
any lens, check the data using the actual equipment.
- When the IV-S30C1/C3 camera is used.
• If you want to use a camera lens other than the IV-S20L16, buy a lens with a C type lens
base. (The IV-S20L16 has a C type lens base.)
• A lens with too short focal length (f = 4.2 mm or 8 mm) will distort the edges of the field of view.
- When the IV-S30C2/C4 camera is used
• Use a commercially available ø17 mm lens.
• When a wide-angle lens is used, the distortion at the edges will be larger.
5-5
5
Connection and Installation Methods
The spectral sensitivity characteristics of the CCD element used in the CCD camera are listed
below.
- Spectral sensitivity characteristics of the CCD element
1.0
0.9
0.8
5
Relative response
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
400
500
600
700
Wave length [nm]
5-6
800
900
1000
Connection and Installation Methods
Relation among the camera installation distance, the field of view, and the focal
length
Lens focal length f=16mm
Focal length
Focal length
Lens focal length f=8mm
Lens focal length f=25mm
4.9
82.8
14.2
15.2 10.0
29.6
46.9
4.8
91.6
16.4
17.5 9.7
34.2
9.8
10.4 21.8
20.4
5.0
5.3 42.9
10.4
70
52.4
55.9
4.7
109.2
20.9
22.3 9.4
43.5
12.0
12.8 20.7
25.0
6.4
6.8 38.9
13.3
80
60.9
65.0
4.7
126.9
25.3
27.0 9.1
52.7
14.2
15.2 20.0
29.6
7.8
8.3 36.4
16.3
90
69.3
74.0
4.6
144.5
29.7
31.7 9.0
62.0
16.4
17.5 19.5
34.2
9.2
9.9 34.6
19.2
100
77.8
83.0
4.6
162.1
34.2
36.5 8.8
71.2
18.6
19.9 19.0
38.9
10.7
11.4 33.3
22.2
120
94.7 101.0
4.5
197.3
43.1
45.9 8.7
89.7
23.1
24.6 18.5
48.1
13.5
14.4 31.6
28.1
140 111.6 119.1
4.5
232.6
51.9
55.4 8.5
108.2
27.5
29.4 18.1
57.4
16.3
17.4 30.4
34.0
160 128.5 137.1
4.4
267.8
60.8
64.9 8.5
126.7
32.0
34.1 17.8
66.6
19.2
20.5 29.6
40.0
180 145.5 155.2
4.4
303.1
69.7
74.4 8.4
145.2
36.4
38.8 17.6
75.9
22.0
23.5 29.0
45.9
83.8 8.4
163.7
40.8
43.6 17.4
85.1
24.9
26.5 28.6
51.8
View
(mm)
Resolution
42.4
44.0
View
(mm)
Focal length
39.7
60
Vertical
View
(mm)
Resolution
55
View
(mm)
Resolution
Resolution
Lens focal length f=4.2mm
Focal length
Camera
installation
distance (mm)
• When the IV-S30C1/C3 camera is used
HoriHoriHoriHoriVertical
Vertical
zontal (mm) (µm)
zontal (mm) (µm)
zontal (mm) (µm) Vertical zontal (mm) (µm)
78.6
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
200 162.4 173.2
4.4
338.3
250 204.7 218.3
4.3
426.4
100.8 107.5 8.3
210.0
51.9
55.4 17.1
108.2
32.0
34.1 27.8
66.6
300 246.9 263.4
4.3
514.5
123.0 131.2 8.2
256.2
63.0
67.3 16.9
131.4
39.1
41.7 27.3
81.4
350 289.2 308.5
4.3
602.6
145.2 154.9 8.2
302.5
74.1
79.1 16.8
154.5
46.2
49.3 26.9
96.2
400 331.5 353.6
4.3
690.7
167.4 178.6 8.2
348.7
85.2
90.9 16.7
177.6
53.3
56.8 26.7
111.0
450 373.8 398.7
4.3
778.8
189.6 202.2 8.1
395.0
96.3 102.8 16.6
200.7
60.4
64.4 26.5
125.8
500 416.1 443.9
4.3
866.9
211.8 225.9 8.1
441.2
107.4 114.6 16.5
223.9
67.5
72.0 26.3
140.6
600 500.7 534.1
4.3 1043.1
256.2 273.3 8.1
533.8
129.6 138.3 16.4
270.1
81.7
87.1 26.1
170.2
700 585.2 624.3
4.2 1219.3
300.6 320.6 8.1
626.3
151.8 162.0 16.4
316.4
95.9 102.3 25.9
199.8
800 669.8 714.5
4.2 1395.5
345.0 368.0 8.1
718.8
174.0 185.7 16.3
362.6 110.1 117.5 25.8
229.4
900 754.4 804.7
4.2 1571.7
389.4 415.4 8.1
811.3
196.2 209.3 16.3
408.9 124.3 132.6 25.7
259.0
455.1 138.5 147.8 25.6
288.6
1000 838.9 894.9
4.2 1747.9
433.8 462.7 8.1
903.8
218.4 233.0 16.3
1100 923.5 985.1
4.2 1924.1
478.2 510.1 8.1
996.3
240.6 256.7 16.2
501.4 152.7 162.9 25.6
318.2
1200 1008.1 1075.4
4.2 2100.3
522.6 557.5 8.1 1088.8
262.8 280.4 16.2
547.6 166.9 178.1 25.5
347.8
1300 1092.7 1165.6
4.2 2276.5
567.0 604.8 8.1 1181.3
285.0 304.1 16.2
593.9 181.2 193.2 25.5
377.4
1400 1177.2 1255.8
4.2 2452.7
611.4 652.2 8.0 1273.8
307.2 327.7 16.2
640.1 195.4 208.4 25.5
407.0
1500 1261.8 1346.0
4.2 2628.9
655.8 699.5 8.0 1366.3
329.4 351.4 16.2
686.4 209.6 223.6 25.4
436.6
1600 1346.4 1436.2
4.2 2805.1
700.2 746.9 8.0 1458.8
351.6 375.1 16.2
732.6 223.8 238.7 25.4
466.2
1700 1430.9 1526.4
4.2 2981.3
744.6 794.3 8.0 1551.3
373.8 398.8 16.2
778.9 238.0 253.9 25.4
495.8
1800 1515.5 1616.6
4.2 3157.5
789.0 841.6 8.0 1643.8
396.0 422.5 16.1
825.1 252.2 269.0 25.4
525.4
1900 1600.1 1706.9
4.2 3333.7
833.4 889.0 8.0 1736.3
418.2 446.2 16.1
871.4 266.4 284.2 25.3
555.0
2000 1684.7 1797.1
4.2 3509.9
877.8 936.4 8.0 1828.8
440.4 469.8 16.1
917.6 280.6 299.3 25.3
584.6
732.6
880.6
2500 2107.5 2248.1
4.2 4390.9 1099.8 1173.2 8.0 2291.3
551.4 588.2 16.1 1148.9 351.6 375.1 25.3
3000 2530.4 2699.2
4.2 5271.9 1321.8 1410.0 8.0 2753.9
662.4 706.6 16.1 1380.2 422.7 450.9 25.2
3500 2953.2 3150.3
4.2 6152.9 1543.8 1646.8 8.0 3216.4
773.4 825.1 16.1 1611.4 493.7 526.7 25.2 1028.7
4000 3376.1 3601.4
4.2 7033.9 1765.8 1883.6 8.0 3678.9
884.4 943.5 16.1 1842.7 564.8 602.5 25.2 1176.7
4500 3798.9 4052.4
4.2 7914.9 1987.8 2120.4 8.0 4141.4
995.4 1061.9 16.1 2074.0 635.8 678.2 25.1 1324.7
5000 4221.8 4503.5
4.2 8795.9 2209.8 2357.2 8.0 4604.0 1106.4 1180.3 16.1 2305.2 706.8 754.0 25.1 1472.7
5500 4644.7 4954.6
4.2 9676.9 2431.8 2594.0 8.0 5066.5 1217.4 1298.7 16.0 2536.5 777.9 829.8 25.1 1620.7
6000 5067.5 5405.6
4.2 10557.9 2653.8 2830.9 8.0 5529.0 1328.4 1417.1 16.0 2767.7 848.9 905.6 25.1 1768.7
6500 5490.4 5856.7
4.2 11438.9 2875.8 3067.7 8.0 5991.5 1439.4 1535.5 16.0 2999.0 920.0 981.4 25.1 1916.7
7000 5913.2 6307.8
4.2 12319.9 3097.8 3304.5 8.0 6454.1 1550.4 1653.9 16.0 3230.3 991.0 1057.1 25.1 2064.7
7500 6336.1 6758.9
4.2 13200.9 3319.8 3541.3 8.0 6916.6 1661.4 1772.3 16.0 3461.5 1062.0 1132.9 25.1 2212.7
5-7
5
Focal
length
View
(mm)
HoriHori- (mm)
Vertical zontal (mm) (µm) Vertical zontal
Lens focal length f=75mm
Focal
length
View
(mm)
Hori- (mm)
(µm) Vertical zontal
Resolution
Focal
length
View
(mm)
Lens focal length f=50mm
Resolution
Lens focal length f=35mm
Resolution
Camera installation
distance (mm)
Connection and Installation Methods
(µm)
55
60
−
−
−
−
70
5
−
−
−
−
80
4.6
4.9
62.2
9.5
90
5.6
6.0
57.3
11.6
100
6.6
7.0
53.8
13.7
120
8.6
9.2
49.4
18.0
3.3
3.6 103.2
140
10.7
11.4
46.7
22.2
4.8
5.1
87.3
9.9
160
12.7
13.5
44.8
26.4
6.2
6.6
78.7
12.9
180
14.7
15.7
43.4
30.7
7.6
8.1
73.4
15.8
9.6
69.7
18.8
7.0
−
−
−
−
200
16.7
17.9
42.4
34.9
9.0
250
21.8
23.3
40.7
45.5
12.6
13.4
64.1
26.2
300
26.9
28.7
39.6
56.0
16.1
17.2
61.0
33.6
8.8
350
32.0
34.1
38.9
66.6
19.7
21.0
59.0
41.0
11.1
11.9
98.9 23.2
400
37.0
39.5
38.4
77.2
23.2
24.8
57.6
48.4
13.5
14.4
94.7 28.1
450
42.1
44.9
38.0
87.7
26.8
28.6
56.6
55.8
15.9
16.9
91.8 33.1
500
47.2
50.3
37.6
98.3
30.3
32.4
55.9
63.2
18.2
19.5
89.6 38.0
600
57.3
61.2
37.2 119.5
37.4
39.9
54.7
78.0
23.0
24.5
86.6 47.9
700
67.5
72.0
36.8 140.6
44.5
47.5
54.0
92.8
27.7
29.6
84.6 57.7
800
77.6
82.8
36.6 161.8
51.6
55.1
53.4 107.6
32.4
34.6
83.2 67.6
900
87.8
93.6
36.4 182.9
58.8
62.7
53.0 122.4
37.2
39.7
82.2 77.5
70.2
52.7 137.2
9.3 105.4 18.3
1000
97.9 104.5
36.3 204.0
65.9
41.9
44.7
81.4 87.3
1100
108.1 115.3
36.2 225.2
73.0
77.8
52.4 152.0
46.6
49.8
80.7 97.2
1200
118.2 126.1
36.1 246.3
80.1
85.4
52.2 166.8
51.4
54.8
80.2 107.1
1300
128.4 136.9
36.0 267.5
87.2
93.0
52.0 181.6
56.1
59.9
79.7 116.9
1400
138.5 147.8
35.9 288.6
94.3 100.6
51.9 196.4
60.9
64.9
79.4 126.8
51.8 211.2
1500
148.7 158.6
35.8 309.8
101.4 108.1
65.6
70.0
79.1 136.7
1600
158.8 169.4
35.8 330.9
108.5 115.7
51.6 226.0
70.3
75.0
78.8 146.5
1700
169.0 180.2
35.7 352.0
115.6 123.3
51.5 240.8
75.1
80.1
78.5 156.4
1800
179.1 191.1
35.7 373.2
122.7 130.9
51.4 255.6
79.8
85.1
78.3 166.3
1900
189.3 201.9
35.7 394.3
129.8 138.5
51.4 270.4
84.5
90.2
78.2 176.1
2000
199.4 212.7
35.6 415.5
136.9 146.0
51.3 285.2
89.3
95.2
78.0 186.0
2500
250.2 266.9
35.5 521.2
172.4 183.9
51.0 359.2 113.0
120.5
77.4 235.3
3000
300.9 321.0
35.4 626.9
207.9 221.8
50.9 433.2 136.6
145.8
76.9 284.7
3500
351.6 375.1
35.4 732.6
243.5 259.7
50.7 507.2 160.3
171.0
76.7 334.0
4000
402.4 429.2
35.3 838.4
279.0 297.6
50.6 581.2 184.0
196.3
76.4 383.3
4500
453.1 483.4
35.3 944.1
314.5 335.5
50.6 655.2 207.7
221.5
76.3 432.7
50.5 729.2 231.4
5000
503.9 537.5
35.2 1049.8
350.0 373.4
246.8
76.2 482.0
5500
554.6 591.6
35.2 1155.5
385.5 411.3
50.5 803.2 255.0
272.1
76.0 531.3
6000
605.4 645.8
35.2 1261.2
421.1 449.1
50.4 877.2 278.7
297.3
76.0 580.7
6500
656.1 699.9
35.2 1367.0
456.6 487.0
50.4 951.2 302.4
322.6
75.9 630.0
7000
706.8 754.0
35.2 1472.7
492.1 524.9
50.4 1025.3 326.1
347.8
75.8 679.4
35.2 1578.4
527.6 562.8
50.3 1099.3 349.8
373.1
75.8 728.7
7500
757.6 808.1
5-8
Connection and Installation Methods
• When the IV-S30C2/C4 camera is used
39.0
60
21.1
22.5
8.8
43.9
8.8
70
25.8
27.5
8.6
53.8
80
30.5
32.6
8.4
90
35.3
37.6
8.3
100
40.0
42.7
120
49.5
140
(µm)
(Hmm)
(Hmm)
(mm)
(µm)
−
−
−
−
Resolution
9.0
Focal length
20.0
Workpiece
size
18.7
Workpiece
size
55
Resolution
(mm)
Workpiece
size
Focal length
(Hmm)
Workpiece
size
Workpiece
size
(Hmm)
Lens focal length f=24 mm
Vertical Vertical direction 24.00
direction
Resolution
Workpiece
size
Camera
installation
distance (mm)
Vertical direction 7.50
Lens focal length f=15mm
Vertical
Vertical direction 15.00
direction
Focal length
Lens focal length f=7.2mm
Vertical
direction
(µm)
(Hmm)
(Hmm)
(mm)
−
−
−
−
9.3
18.2
18.3
4.1
4.4
30.9
8.6
11.1
11.9
17.6
23.2
5.6
6.0
29.1
11.7
63.6
13.5
14.4
17.1
28.1
7.1
7.6
28.0
14.8
73.5
15.9
16.9
16.8
33.1
8.6
9.2
27.3
17.9
8.2
83.4
18.2
19.5
16.6
38.0
10.1
10.7
26.8
21.0
52.8
8.1
103.1
23.0
24.5
16.2
47.9
13.0
13.9
26.2
27.1
59.0
62.9
8.0
122.8
27.7
29.6
16.0
57.7
16.0
17.1
25.8
33.3
160
68.4
73.0
7.9
142.6
32.4
34.6
15.9
67.6
18.9
20.2
25.5
39.5
180
77.9
83.1
7.9
162.3
37.2
39.7
15.8
77.5
21.9
23.4
25.3
45.6
200
87.4
93.2
7.8
182.0
41.9
44.7
15.7
87.3
24.9
26.5
25.1
51.8
250
111.1
118.5
7.8
231.4
53.8
57.3
15.5
112.0
32.3
34.4
24.9
67.2
300
134.7
143.7
7.7
280.7
65.6
70.0
15.4
136.7
39.7
42.3
24.7
82.6
50.2
24.6
98.1
82.6
15.4
161.3
47.1
89.3
95.2
15.3
186.0
54.5
58.1
24.5
113.5
101.1
107.9
15.3
210.7
61.9
66.0
24.5
128.9
113.0
120.5
15.3
235.3
69.3
73.9
24.4
144.3
576.7
136.6
145.8
15.2
284.7
84.1
89.7
24.3
175.1
7.6
675.4
160.3
171.0
15.2
334.0
98.9
105.5
24.3
206.0
396.3
7.6
774.1
184.0
196.3
15.2
383.3
113.7
121.2
24.3
236.8
446.8
7.6
872.8
207.7
221.5
15.1
432.7
128.5
137.0
24.2
267.6
466.3
497.4
7.6
971.4
231.4
246.8
15.1
482.0
143.3
152.8
24.2
298.5
1100
513.6
547.9
7.6 1070.1
255.0
272.1
15.1
531.3
158.1
168.6
24.2
329.3
1200
561.0
598.4
7.6 1168.8
278.7
297.3
15.1
580.7
172.9
184.4
24.2
360.2
1300
608.3
648.9
7.5 1267.4
302.4
322.6
15.1
630.0
187.7
200.2
24.2
391.0
1400
655.7
699.4
7.5 1366.1
326.1
347.8
15.1
679.4
202.5
216.0
24.1
421.8
1500
703.1
750.0
7.5 1464.8
349.8
373.1
15.1
728.7
217.3
231.8
24.1
452.7
1600
750.4
800.5
7.5 1563.5
373.4
398.4
15.1
778.0
232.1
247.5
24.1
483.5
1700
797.8
851.0
7.5 1662.1
397.1
423.6
15.1
827.4
246.9
263.3
24.1
514.3
279.1
24.1
545.2
350
158.4
169.0
7.7
330.1
400
182.1
194.2
7.7
379.4
450
205.8
219.5
7.6
428.7
500
229.5
244.8
7.6
478.1
600
276.8
295.3
7.6
700
324.2
345.8
800
371.5
900
418.9
1000
77.4
901.5
7.5 1760.8
420.8
448.9
15.1
876.7
261.7
892.5
952.0
7.5 1859.5
444.5
474.1
15.1
926.0
276.5
294.9
24.1
576.0
939.9
1002.6
7.5 1958.1
468.2
499.4
15.1
975.4
291.3
310.7
24.1
606.8
2500 1176.7
1255.2
7.5 2451.5
586.6
625.7
15.0
1222.1
365.3
389.6
24.1
761.0
3000 1413.5
1507.8
7.5 2944.9
705.0
752.0
15.0
1468.7
439.3
468.6
24.1
915.2
3500 1650.3
1760.4
7.5 3438.2
823.4
878.3
15.0
1715.4
513.3
547.5
24.1
1069.4
4000 1887.1
2013.0
7.5 3931.6
941.8
1004.6
15.0
1962.1
587.3
626.4
24.0
1223.5
4500 2123.9
2265.6
7.5 4424.9
1060.2
1130.9
15.0
2208.8
661.3
705.4
24.0
1377.7
5000 2360.7
2518.2
7.5 4918.3
1178.6
1257.2
15.0
2455.4
735.3
784.3
24.0
1531.9
5500 2597.5
2770.8
7.5 5411.7
1297.0
1383.5
15.0
2702.1
809.3
863.3
24.0
1686.1
6000 2834.3
3023.4
7.5 5905.0
1415.4
1509.8
15.0
2948.8
883.3
942.2
24.0
1840.2
6500 3071.1
3276.0
7.5 6398.4
1533.8
1636.1
15.0
3195.5
957.3
1021.1
24.0
1994.4
7000 3307.9
3528.6
7.5 6891.7
1652.2
1762.4
15.0
3442.2
1031.3
1100.1
24.0
2148.6
7500 3544.7
3781.2
7.5 7385.1
1770.6
1888.7
15.0
3688.8
1105.3
1179.0
24.0
2302.8
1800
845.1
1900
2000
5-9
5
Connection and Installation Methods
Table of magnifications and viewing size
(Vertical size x Horizontal size x Diagonal size) mm
Magnification 1/3" viewing field 14" monitor magnification
5
×0.14
25×27×36.6
×0.16
22×23×32.2
9.4
×0.18
20×21×29.2
10.6
×0.2
18×19×26.3
11.8
×0.3
12×13×17.5
17.8
×0.5
7.2×7.7×10.53
29.6
×0.75
4.8×5.1×7.02
44.4
×0.8
4.5×4.8×6.58
47.4
×1
3.6×3.8×5.26
59.3
×2
1.8×1.9×2.63
118.6
×4
0.9×0.96×1.316
237.2
×4.5
0.8×0.85×1.170
266.8
×6
0.6×0.64×0.877
355.8
×8
0.45×0.48×0.658
474.4
×10
0.36×0.38×0.526
593
×12
0.3×0.32×0.439
711.6
8.3
5-10
Connection and Installation Methods
5-2 Installing, connecting and wiring the IV-S31M/S32M/S33M controller
[1] Connecting equipment to the controller
Connect the cameras (up to 2 cameras), remote key pad, and monitor to the controller (IV-S31M/S32M/
S33M).
Controller
(plan view)
INPUT
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
OUTPUT
VIDEO
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
0V
IV-S3*M
POWER
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
Camera 2 connector (CAMERA2)
Remote key pad
connector
(REMOTE)
Camera 1 connector (CAMERA1)
Monitor connector (VIDEO)
Controller
(side view)
3
Remote keypad
Moniter
2
1
1
4
Camera 2
4
Camera 1
1 Connect the camera cable (IV-S30KC3/S30KC5/S30KC7) connector or a connector of the main
housing connection cable (IV-S30EA1) to the camera 1 (CAMERA1) and camera 2 (CAMERA2)
connectors on the controller.
Note: Only connect or disconnect the camera connectors while the power is OFF.
The main housing connection cable (IV-S30EA1) can be connected to the IV-S33M only.
- Push the convex side of the connector into the concave side of the mating connector. When the
connector is all the way on, it clicks.
- To disconnect the connector, hold the plug of the connector, and pull it straight out.
- A camera connected to the camera 1 connector (CAMERA1) is treated as camera 1 by this
system, and a camera connected to the camera 2 connector (CAMERA2) is treated as camera
2.
- You must have a camera connected to the camera 1 connector.
2 Plug the remote key pad (IV-S30RK1) connector into the remote keypad connector (REMOTE) on
the controller.
5-11
5
Connection and Installation Methods
3 Connect the monitor to the monitor connector (VIDEO: RCA jack) on the controller using the
monitor cable (supplied with the controller) and a conversion connector (supplied with controller).
If the monitor has an RCA jack, the conversion connector is not required.
- Use a monitor with either an EIA or NTSC compatible video input terminal.
- Connect the cable to the monitor connector straight and treat it carefully.
BNC connector
Controller
Monitor
Monitor connector (VIDEO)
Conversion
connector
Monitor cable
(Cable length 2 m)
RCA jack
5
Monitor
- If you need a monitor cable longer than 2 m, you can purchase a one at a video store.
4 For details about connecting and installing cameras, see page 5-23 in this manual.
Ë Leave enough space around the controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
In order to connect camera cables, the remote key pad cable, monitor cable and D-sub connector to
the controller, the following space (min.) is required.
148mm
130mm
9mm
9mm
· Do not bend the camera cables repeatedly.
· Make sure the installation location allows
enough space for the input/output wires going to
the I/O terminal block and the power terminal
block on the controller.
INPUT
92mm
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
0V
OUTPUT
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
POWER
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
100mm
(minimum)
VIDEO
IV-S3*M
Camera cable
5-12
Connection and Installation Methods
[2] Installation
To install the IV-S31M/S32M/S33M controller, secure the bottom of the housing on the mounting
surface with the two main housing brackets (supplied with the controller.)
controller
Housing bracket
Mounting surface
Mounting procedure
1 Attach the two housing brackets on the bottom of the controller.
Four screws (M 3 x 6) are supplied to attach the brackets.
5
Housing bracket (2 pcs.)
Bottom view
Screw position (4 places)
2 Secure the housing on the mounting surface with the brackets.
5
138
4.5
(Unit: mm)
INPUT
Mounting position
(4 places)
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
OUTPUT
0V
IV-S3*M
70
POWER
100
10.5
5
10.5
Housing bracket
VIDEO
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
148
The external dimensions of the housing brackets and the controller are shown on the following page.
5-13
Connection and Installation Methods
- External dimensions of the controller (IV-S31/S32M/S33M)
70
25
(Unit: mm)
CAMERA2
INT
0V
MODE
100
100
5
100
IV-S30EA1
POWER
+24V
EXT
CAMERA1
FG
CONTROLLER
70
25
25
70
70
- External dimensions of housing bracket
(Unit: mm)
2 holes 3.2 mm in diameter
(for attaching the bracket to the controller)
81
5
70
10.5
10
5
10
11
23
5
1.6
5.7
4.5
10.5
91
Mounting position
(2 places: for securing the bracket to the mounting surface)
5-14
Connection and Installation Methods
[3] Connecting a power supply
Connect a commercially available constant-voltage power supply to the power terminals (POWER: +24
V, 0 V) on the controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M). Use a 24 VDC ± 10%, 500 mA or more constantvoltage power supply.
- Use an individual power supply to supply power to the controller. If the power supply is used to power
other equipment, measurement errors may occur.
- Check the polarity of the power supply terminals, +24 V and 0 V. If power is supplied with the polarity
inverted, the controller may be damaged.
- Only connect or disconnect the camera cable and other equipment while the power is OFF.
Frame ground
terminal
Constant-voltage
power supply
24 VDC
(+)
(-)
5
Fuse
(1A)
Power supply terminal
(POWER: + 24V)
Frame ground
terminal
Power supply terminal
(POWER : 0V)
INPUT
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
X5
Y4
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
0V
OUTPUT
This distance must be
as short as possible.
(Recommended distance:
less than 1 m)
Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
INPUT
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
OUTPUT
VIDEO
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
0V
IV-S3*M
POWER
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
Note
To improve the noise resistance of the constant-voltage power supply connected to the
controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M), observe the following precautions.
- Ground the FG terminal of the constant-voltage power supply according to the class 3
grounding.
- The power line between the controller and the constant-voltage power supply must be
as short as possible. (Recommended distance: less than 1 m)
Do not run the power supply line near any noise generating sources, such as electric
motor lines.
- Use twisted-pair wire for the power supply line.
5-15
Connection and Installation Methods
[4] Connecting to the input/output terminals (parallel I/F)
8 input terminals and 9 output terminals are available on the input/output terminal block on the
controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M).
The input terminal block has INPUT terminals X0 to X7 and COM , and the output terminal block has
OUTPUT terminals Y0 to Y7, READY and COM .
[Input/output terminal block on the controller]
Input terminals (INPUT)
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
COM
COM
READY
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
5
Output terminals (OUTPUT)
INPUT
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 COM +24V
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 READY COM 0V
OUTPUT
Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
INPUT
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
0V
OUTPUT
VIDEO
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
IV-S32M
POWER
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
Interrupt processing input
(1 terminal)
External trigger (X0)
Input (7 terminals)
-IV-S33M
Object type change (X1 to 6): 6 terminals
External input (X7): 1 terminals
-IV-S32M
Object type change (X1 to 5): 5 terminals
External input (X6 and 7): 2 terminals
-IV-S31M
Object type change (X1 to 4): 4 terminals
External input (X5 to 7): 3 terminals
Common for input (1 terminal)
(+) or (-) cocmmon
Output (9 terminals)
READY: 1 terminal
Logical output set by user (Y0 to 7): 8 terminals
Terminal
block
Common for output (1 terminal) (+) or (-)
Power supply (2 terminals)
5-16
24 VDC: 1 terminal, 0 V: 1 terminal
Connection and Installation Methods
(1) Input terminals (INPUT) X0 to X7
1 IV-S31M/S32M
Input
Input/output condition setting *1
terminal
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
CCD sampling start = General-purpose serial
interface signal or auto detect (edge + level)
X0
Measurement start input I/F = Parallel + Generalpurpose serial interface signal + USB
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
CCD sampling start = Parallel
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
CCD sampling start = General-purpose serial
interface signal or auto detect (edge + level)
Input details
External input
Measurement start input
External input
Object type numbers *2
IV-S32M:0 to 31
IV-S31M:0 to 15
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
- X5 is used for external
CCD sampling start = Parallel
input on the IV-S31M
Parallel input X6 is used for external input, a register reference image signal, or
X6
to correct a total area judgement.
Parallel input X7 is used for external input, a change in the output camera
X7
signal, measurements with each camera, and for overlapping images.
*1: For details about the settings on the [I/O CONDITIONS] menu, see "Setting the Input/Output
Conditions" in the IV-S30 (IV-S31M/S32M) User’s Manual (Function and operation).
*2: Object type numbers and X1 to X5 have the following relationships.
X1 to 5 Measurement start input I/F = Parallel + Generalpurpose serial + USB
• IV-S32M
Object type
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON OFF
OFF OFF ON ON ON
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF OFF ON
OFF ON OFF ON OFF
OFF ON OFF ON ON
OFF ON ON OFF OFF
OFF ON ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON ON OFF
OFF ON ON ON ON
Object type
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
X5
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
X4 X3 X2 X1
OFF OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF ON ON
OFF ON OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON OFF
OFF ON ON ON
ON OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF ON
ON OFF ON OFF
ON OFF ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF
ON ON OFF ON
ON ON ON OFF
ON ON ON ON
• IV-S31M
Object type
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X4 X3 X2 X1 Object type
OFF OFF OFF OFF
8
OFF OFF OFF ON
9
OFF OFF ON OFF
10
OFF OFF ON ON
11
OFF ON OFF OFF
12
OFF ON OFF ON
13
OFF ON ON OFF
14
OFF ON ON ON
15
5-17
X4
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
X3 X2 X1
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON
OFF ON OFF
OFF ON ON
ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF
ON ON ON
5
Connection and Installation Methods
2 IV-S33M
Input terminal
X0
X1 to 5
5
X6
X7
Input/output condition setting *1
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
CCD sampling start = General-purpose serial interface signal or auto
detect (edge + level)
Measurement start input I/F = Parallel + General-purpose serial
interface signal + USB
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
CCD sampling start = Parallel
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
CCD sampling start = General-purpose serial interface signal or auto
detect (edge + level)
Input details
External input
Measurement
start input
External input
Measurement start input I/F = Parallel + General-purpose serial + USB Object type
numbers *2
IV-S33M:0 to 63
Measurement start input I/F = CCD trigger
CCD sampling start = Parallel
Parallel input X6 is select one of 64 object types.
Parallel input X6 is used for external input, a register reference image signal, or to
correct a total area judgement.
Parallel input X7 is used for external input, a change in the output camera signal,
measurements with each camera, and for overlapping images.
*1: For details about the settings on the [I/O CONDITIONS] menu, see "Setting the Input/Output
Conditions" in the IV-S30 (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) User’s Manual, Function and Operation.
*2: Object type numbers and X1 to X6 have the following relationships.
06
Object type X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
32
OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
33
ON
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
34
OFF
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
35
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
36
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
37
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
38
OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
07
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
39
ON OFF OFF ON
08
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
40
ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
09
OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
41
ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
10
OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
42
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
11
OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
43
ON OFF ON OFF ON
12
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
44
ON OFF ON
ON OFF OFF
13
OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
45
ON OFF ON
ON OFF ON
14
OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
46
ON OFF ON
ON
ON OFF
15
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
47
ON OFF ON
ON
ON
16
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
48
ON
ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
17
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
49
ON
ON OFF OFF OFF ON
18
OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
50
ON
ON OFF OFF ON OFF
19
OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
51
ON
ON OFF OFF ON
20
OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
52
ON
ON OFF ON OFF OFF
21
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
53
ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON
22
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
54
ON
ON OFF ON
ON OFF
23
OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
55
ON
ON OFF ON
ON
24
OFF ON
ON OFF OFF OFF
56
ON
ON
ON OFF OFF OFF
25
OFF ON
ON OFF OFF ON
57
ON
ON
ON OFF OFF ON
26
OFF ON
ON OFF ON OFF
58
ON
ON
ON OFF ON OFF
Object type X6 X5 X4 X3 X2
00
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
01
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
02
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
03
04
05
X1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
27
OFF ON
ON OFF ON ON
59
ON
ON
ON OFF ON
28
OFF ON
ON ON OFF OFF
60
ON
ON
ON
ON OFF OFF
29
OFF ON
ON ON OFF ON
61
ON
ON
ON
ON OFF ON
30
OFF ON
ON ON ON OFF
62
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON OFF
31
OFF ON
ON ON ON ON
63
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
- When the parallel input X6 is not set to "64OBJ-CHG (select from 64 object types)," only X1 to X5
are available to specify one of 32 object types.
5-18
Connection and Installation Methods
(2) Output terminals (OUTPUT) Y0 to Y7 and READY
Y0
to Y7
Result of logical calculation output
- Specify in the FINAL-OUTPUT on the [TYPE MEAS COND] menu.
These signals will turn ON when the measurement start input is enabled.
READY - For information about the timing chart and other details, see "Setting the Input/Output Conditions" in the IV-S30 User’s Manual (Function and Operation).
(3) I/O port
The input/output terminals are isolated by photocouplers, to prevent malfunctions due to noise. Use
them within the rated range. The specifications of the input/output ports are listed below.
Item
Rating
Rated input voltage
12/24 VDC
Input voltage range
10.5 to 26.4 VDC
Input Input voltage level
Output
ON: 10.5 V or less OFF: 3 V or more
Input current level
ON: 3 mA or less OFF: 0.9 mA or more
Input impedance
3.3 k ohm
Rated output voltage
12/24 VDC
Load voltage range
10.5 to 27 VDC
5
Rated max. output current 100 mA DC
Output type
Photo MOS open drain
ON resistance
30 ohms or less
Isolation method
Photo MOS isolation
Response time
3 ms or less (OFF to ON, ON to OFF)
(4) Wiring to the controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
X7
COM
Load
+
L
Y0
L
Y7
L
READY
+
Fuse
(0.5A)
COM
Protective element
(Power supply
limit: 33 V)
Controller
X0
-
Power
supply
Output
Power
supply
Input
5-19
Connection and Installation Methods
[5] Connection for communications with personal computer (general purpose serial I/F)
Connect a personal computer to the communication connector (RS232C/RS422) on the controller (IVS31M/S32M/S33M).
A 9-pin D-sub, male connector is included with the controller.
Controller
(plan view)
INPUT
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
OUTPUT
Personal
computer
VIDEO
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
0V
IV-S3*M
POWER
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
Controller
(side view)
5
RS-232C/RS-422
Communication connector
(RS232C/RS422 : 9-pin D-sub female,
rock screw M2.6)
(1) When communicating through the RS-232C port
- The controller pin arrangement of the communication connector (for RS-232C)
5
1
(9-pin D-sub, female)
9
6
Communication Pin No. Signal
standard
name
RS-232C
2
RD
3
5
SD
SG
FG
Connector shield
Personal computer
DOS/V, IBM-PC
Direction
Details
Received data
Input
(personal computer - IV-S30)
Transmitted data
(IV-S30 - personal computer) Output
Signal ground
−
−
Frame ground
Communication connector on the controller
(RS232C/RS422: 9-pin D-sub)
Signal
Function
Pin No.
name
Connector
Frame ground
FG
case
RD
Received data
2
SD
Transmitted data
3
Signal ground
SG
5
PC98 series
9-pin D-sub 25-pin D-sub
Signal
name
Pin No. Pin No.
Connector Connector
FG
case
case
3
2
SD
2
3
RD
5
7
SG
7
4
RS
8
5
CS
6
6
DSR
1
8
CD
4
20
DTR
1
6
FL1
FL2
Memory protection 1
Memory protection 1
*(RS-232C)
*The maximum length of the communication cable depends on the communication speed.
Communication speed (kbps) Cable length - Conduct a communication
test before using the devices for
9.6, 19.2
15 m or less
measurements.
2 to 3 m
38.4, 57.6, 115.2
5-20
Connection and Installation Methods
(2) When communicating through the RS-422
Specify the 4-wire or 2-wire RS-422 system on the [SET COMM PARMS] menu.
- The controller pin arrangement of the communication connector (for RS-422C)
5
1
(9-pin D-sub female)
9
6
Communication Pin No.
standard
4
7
RS-422
8
9
Connector field
Signal
Details
name
TA
Transmitted data
TB (Controller - Personal computer)
Received data
RA
RB (Personal computer - Controller)
FG
Frame ground
Direction
Output
Input
−
1 4-wire system
Personal
computer RS-232C/422 converter
Z-101HE
Signal
name
1 FG SHIELD
FG
2 TD
RD(+)
TD
3 RD
RD(—)
RD
7 SG
TD(+)
SG
TD(—)
15 m
or less
(RS-232C)
Shielded twisted-pair cable
Controller (9-pin D-sub)
Pin No. Signal
name
Connector
case
Function
Connector frame ground
4
7
8
9
FG
TA
TB
RA
RB
1
6
FL1 Memory protection 1
FL2 Memory protection 2
Transmitted data
(Controller - Personal computer)
Received data
(Personal computer -Controller)
1 km or less
(RS-422)
2 2-wire system
Personal
computer RS-232C/422 converter
Z-101HE
Signal
name
1 FG SHIELD
FG
2 TD
TD
RD(+)
3 RD
RD
4 RS
RS
RD(—)
7 SG
SG
15 m
or less
(RS-232C)
Shielded twisted-pair cable
Controller (9-pin D-sub)
Signal
Pin No. name
Connector
case
1 km or less
(RS-422)
5-21
Function
4
7
8
9
FG Connector frame ground
TA
Transmitted data
TB (Controller - Personal computer)
RA
Received data
RB (Personal computer -Controller)
1
6
FL1 Memory protection 1
FL2 Memory protection 2
5
Connection and Installation Methods
[6] Connecting a programmable controller using the computer link function
Connect a programmable controller to the communication connector (RS232C/RS422) and the input/
output terminals on the controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M).
Input/output terminals
Controller
(plan view)
Programmable controller
X0
Y0
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
OUTPUT
0V
*
IV-S3 M
POWER
O/I
Communication
port
INPUT
2
VIDEO
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
5
1
Controller
(side view)
RS-232C/RS-422
Communication connector
(RS232C/RS422)
1 Connect the computer link connector (RS-232C/RS-411) of a programmable controller to the
communication connector (RS232C/RS422: 9-pin D-sub, female) on the controller.
- See "Computer Link" in the IV-S30 User’s Manual (Function and Operation).
(The pin arrangement of the communication connector on the controller is shown on page 5-20
to 5-21.)
- In the case of RS-232C, the maximum communication cable length depends on the
communication speed.
Communication speed
9.6, 19.2
38.4, 57.6, 115.2
Cable length
15 m or less
2 to 3 m
Conduct a communication test before using the devices for measurements.
2 Connect the input/output terminals of the programmable controller to the input/output terminals
on the controller.
- See item [4] "Connecting to the input/output terminals (parallel I/F)" for details about wiring
procedure.
5-22
Connection and Installation Methods
5-3 Installing and connecting the IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4 camera
[1] Installing and connecting the IV-S30C1/C3
(1) Connections
Up to two IV-S30C1 standard cameras or IV-S30C3 high-speed cameras can be connected to the
following controllers using camera cables.
Camera
Controller to connect
IV-S30C1
IV-S31M, IV-S32M, IV-S33M
IV-S30C3
IV-S33M
Cables to be used
IV-S30KC3 (3 m), IV-S30KC5 (5 m),
IV-S30KC7 (7 m),
IV-S30KC3 (3 m), IV-S30KC5 (5 m)
Note 1: Do not connect the IV-S30C3 to the IV-S31M/S32M. The IV-S30C3 cannot be used with the
IV-S30KC7.
Camera 2 connector: CAMERA2
Controller (side view)
Camera 1 connector: CAMERA 1
3
5
2
1
Camera 1
Camera
Camera
(IV-S30C1/C3) cable
Connector
Plug
1
Camera 2
1 Connect the camera cable(s) to the CAMERA 1 and CAMERA 2 connectors on the controller.
- To connect them, match the keyed portion of the connectors and press in. When they are firmly
connected, you will hear a click.
- To unplug a connector, hold the plug housing and pull it straight out.
- Any camera plugged into the CAMERA 1 connector will be system camera 1 and any camera
plugged into the CAMERA 2 connector will be system camera 2 in the IV-S30 system.
Note 2: Make sure to turn OFF the power before connecting or disconnecting the cameras.
Note 3: If there is only one camera, make sure to connect it as system camera 1.
2 Plug the other end of the camera cable into the IV-S30C1/C3, and tighten the securing ring on the
plug housing.
3 Screw the IV-S20L16 camera lens (or similar) into the lens holder on the IV-S30C1/C3 until it is
secure.
Camera lens
(IV-S20L16 or similar)
Lens holder
IV-S30C1/C3
Remarks
- You cannot use different types of cameras at the same time with the same controller
(standard, high-speed and EIA cameras cannot be mixed). When an IV-S30C1 or IV-S30C3
is connected to the controller, the other cameras that can be connected to the controller are
as follows:
Camera
IV-S30C1
IV-S30C3
Compatible second cameras
IV-S30C2 (Micro camera)
IV-S30C4 (Micro, high-speed camera)
5-23
Connection and Installation Methods
(2) Installing the camera body
Attach the camera (IV-S30C1/C3) on the mounting surface with the camera angle bracket (supplied
with the camera).
- Installation example 1
Camera front view
Camera side view
Camera angle bracket
IV-S30C1/C3
Camera lens
(IV-S20L16 or similar)
Mounting
surface
5
- Installation example 2
Camera angle bracket
IV-S30C1/C3
Mounting
surface
- Installation example 3
IV-S30C1/C3
Camera angle bracket
Mounting
surface
Installation procedure
1 Attach the camera angle bracket to the tapped M3 hole on the camera body (20 mm mounting
pitch: one of three holes). Two screws (M 3 x 6) are supplied with the camera for attaching the
angle.
2 Attach the camera controller angle to the mounting surface with the slotted holes 3.2 mm wide (20
mm mounting pitch) or 1/4-20 UNC threaded hole.
The external dimensions of the camera angle bracket and camera body are shown on the following
page.
5-24
Connection and Installation Methods
2 M3 tapped holes
2 M3 tapped holes
IV-S30KC3:3000
IV-S30KC5:5000
IV-S30KC7:7000
37
7
*2
φ14.7
30
2 M3 tapped holes
φ7
*
5 20
32
32
5 20
*
32
- External dimensions when the IV-S20L16 camera lens and IV-S30KC3/KC5/KC7 camera
cable are connected to the IV-S30C1/C3.
(Unit: mm)
3
28.5∼34
37
43
43
37
7
7
*1
5 20 5
30
*1 Attach the camera angle bracket to one of the
tapped M3 holes 20 mm mounting pitch (3
places).
*2 The IV-S30KC7 cannot be connected to the IVS30C3.
- External dimensions of camera angle bracket
4 slotted holes wide
(for securing on the camera body)
10°
10°
(Unit: mm)
25
39
20
5.5
2 slotted holes 3.2 mm wide
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
22.5
28
31
17
1/4-20 UNC threaded hole
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
3.2
28
20
60°
5-25
5
Connection and Installation Methods
Note
- When the camera cable (IV-S30KC3/S30KC5/S30KC7) is bent, its bending radius should be
larger than 40 mm.
If the camera cable will be bent repeatedly during operation, design the cable layout so that
the bending radius is 75 mm or more and use components that can be flexed up to 2 million
times.
Camera cable
Bending radius: Min. 40 mm
5
5-26
Connection and Installation Methods
[2] Installing and connecting the IV-S30C2/C4
(1) Connections
Up to two IV-S30C2 micro cameras or IV-S30C4 micro, high-speed cameras can be connected to the
following controllers using camera cables.
Camera
Controller to connect
IV-S30C2
IV-S31M, IV-S32M, IV-S33M
IV-S30C4
IV-S33M
Cables to be used
IV-S30KC3 (3 m), IV-S30KC5 (5 m),
IV-S30KC7 (7 m),
IV-S30KC3 (3 m), IV-S30KC5 (5 m)
Note 1: Do not connect the IV-S30C4 to the IV-S31M/S32M. The IV-S30C4 cannot be used with the
IV-S30KC7.
Controller (side)
Camera 2 connector: CAMERA 2
Camera 1 connector: CAMERA 1
5
2
3
Camera 1
1
IV-S30C4
Camera
cable
Connector
Plug
Camera 2
(Some parts of the external appearance of the IV-S30C2 are different from the IV-S30C4.)
1 Connect the camera cable(s) to the CAMERA 1 and CAMERA 2 connectors on the controller.
- To connect them, match the keyed portion of the connectors and press in. When they are firmly
connected, you will hear a click.
- To unplug a connector, hold the plug housing and pull it straight out.
- Any camera plugged into the CAMERA 1 connector will be system camera 1 and any camera
plugged into the CAMERA 2 connector will be system camera 2 in the IV-S30 system.
Note 2: Make sure to turn OFF the power before connecting or disconnecting the cameras.
Note 3: If there is only one camera, make sure to connect it as system camera 1.
Remarks
- You cannot use different types of cameras at the same time with the same controller
(standard, high-speed and EIA cameras cannot be mixed). When an IV-S30C2 or IV-S30C4
is connected to the controller, the other cameras that can be connected to the controller are
as follows:
Camera
IV-S30C2
IV-S30C4
Compatible second cameras
IV-S30C1 (standard camera)
IV-S30C3 (high-speed camera)
5-27
Connection and Installation Methods
2 Plug the camera connector on the camera cable (camera conversion cable) into the cable
connector on the IV-S30C2/C4 camera and screw it down to secure the connection.
3 Screw a commercially available lens into the camera head of the IV-S30C2/C4.
Lens
(commercially available)
Camera head
1. Screw the lens in until the camera image is focused.
2. Secure the lens using the lens locking ring on the camera head
Lens locking ring
M15.5×0.5
7
φ1
φ16
• External dimensions of the IV-S30C2 camera head
7.4±0.1
*
3 22±0.1
35.6
*7
• External dimensions of the IV-S30C4 camera head
M15.5×0.5
7
φ1
φ16
5
7.4±0.1
*
3 22±0.1
35.6
*7
5-28
(Unit: mm)
Connection and Installation Methods
(2) Installation of the camera head
1 Put the camera head through the bracket (supplied with the IV-S30C2/C4) from the cable side
and slide the camera head into position.
Camera head bracket
(accessory)
Installed position of
the camera head
Camera head
Lens
(commercially available)
2 Secure the camera head bracket using the M3x6 screws that come with the IV-S30C2/C4.
5
Screws
(M3 x 6:
accessory)
Mounting hole
(φ3.4: For securing the
camera assembly in place)
3 Secure the camera head assembly in place using the mounting hole (ø3.4) on the camera head
bracket.
Front view
Side view
Installation surface
Installation surface
Note: The camera head bracket supplied with the camera is for simple installations and is not
vibration-damping. To meet specific needs, the user may have to make a specialized bracket.
• External dimensions of the camera head bracket
(Unit: mm)
.9
M3 hole
4
φ 3.
φ3
.4
φ3
.4
0.4
7 to10
(Shape before installation)
5-29
20.8
27.9
31.4
5
φ1
6.5
Connection and Installation Methods
(3) Installation of the camera body
1. Attach the camera mounting bracket (comes with the IV-S30C2/C4) to the three M3 tapped holes
(spacing: 20 mm) on the camera body using the M3×6 installation screws that come with the IVS30C2/C4.
2. Secure the camera mounting bracket on the installation surface using a 3.2mm long, 20 mm
difference screw or a 1/4-20 UNC screw hole.
[Installation example]
Front view
Side view
Camera body
Camera mounting bracket
(accessory)
Camera body
Installation
surface
Camera mounting bracket
5
(Unit: mm)
- External dimensions of the controller (IV-S30C2)
32
*
20
5
30
44.7
6.5
*
5 20
28.5
28.5
44.7
2 M3 tapped holes
*
5 20 5
28.5
44.7
2 M3 tapped holes
* Attach the camera angle bracket to one of
the tapped M3 holes 20 mm mounting
pitch (3 places).
2 M3 tapped holes
- External dimensions of the controller (IV-S30C4)
32
*
20
5
30
50
6.5
2 M3 tapped holes
*
5 20
28.5
28.5
50
*
5 20 5
28.5
50
2 M3 tapped holes
* Attach the camera angle bracket to one of
the tapped M3 holes 20 mm mounting
2 M3 tapped holes
5-30
Connection and Installation Methods
- External dimensions of camera angle bracket
4 slotted holes wide
(for securing on the camera body)
10°
10°
(Unit: mm)
25
39
20
5.5
2 slotted holes 3.2 mm wide
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
22.5
28
31
17
1/4-20 UNC threaded hole
(for attachment to the mounting surface)
3.2
28
20
60°
Note
- When the camera head cable is bent, its bending radius should be larger than 40 mm.
If the camera cable will be bent repeatedly during operation, design the cable layout so that
the bending radius is 75 mm or more and use components that can be flexed up to 2 million
times.
Head cable
* Bending radius: Min. 40 mm
*
*
5-31
5
Connection and Installation Methods
5-4 Installing, connecting, and wiring the IV-S30EA1 camera converter
[1] Connection to the IV-S33M controller
Connect the IV-S30EA1 camera converter to the IV-S33M controller using the main interface cable that
comes with the camera converter.
Note: Do not connect the IV-S30EA1 to an IV-S31M/S32M controller.
CAMERA2 CAMERA1
INPUT
Top view of the
IV-S33M
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 COM +24V
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 BUSY COM 0V
IV-S33M
IV-S30EA1
OUTPUT
POWER
+24V
POWER
0V
Top view of the
IV-S30EA1
FG
5
VIDEO CAMERA1 CAMERA2
Camera 1 connector:
CAMERA 1
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
CONTROLLER
Camera 2 connector:
CAMERA 2
Side view of the
IV-S33M
Side view of the
IV-S30EA1
①
①
Camera 1 connector
②
Camera 2 connector
Converter connector
1
2
Main interface cable
(comes with the
IV-S30EA1)
1 Connect the camera 1 and 2 connectors on the main interface cable to the CAMERA 1 and
CAMERA 2 connectors on the IV-S33M. Make sure the connector numbers match.
Note: Make sure to turn OFF the power before connecting or disconnecting the cameras or
connector.
- To unplug a connector, hold the plug housing and pull it straight out.
- Any camera plugged into the CAMERA 1 connector will be system camera 1 and any camera
plugged into the CAMERA 2 connector will be system camera 2 in the IV-S30 system.
2 Connect the converter connector on the main interface cable to the controller connector on the IVS30EA1.
• External dimensions of the main interface cable.
250
45
1
54
2
45
(Unit: mm)
5-32
Connection and Installation Methods
[2] Connection to an EIA camera
This section describes how to connect a commercially available camera that conforms to the EIA
standards to the IV-S30EA1.
(1) Cameras that can be connected
The specifications of the EIA cameras that can be connected to the IV-S30EA1 and the cameras we
recommend are as follows:
Item
Specifications
Number of scan lines
Scan method
Frequency
Image output
Power supply
Current consumption
525
2:1 interlace
Horizontal 15.734 kHz, vertical 59.94 Hz
1.0 Vp-p (with a 75 ohm load)
+12 VDC ±10%
300 mA maximum
• Recommended cameras
5
Model
Manufacturer
XC-75
Sony
CS8320B Tokyo Electronics Industries
(2) Connecting between the IV-S30EA1 and an EIA camera
Connect the IV-S30EA1 to an EIA camera using the EIA camera cable.
Check the signals (pin assignment) against the figures below.
EIA camera connectors 2
(CAMERA 2)
CAMERA2
FG
0V
+24V
CAMERA1
POWER
IV-S30EA1
CONTROLLER
IV-S30EA1
EIA cameras
(Maximum 2:
commercially available)
EIA camera connectors 1
(CAMERA 1)
Camera cable
(Ex.: Sony CCXC-12P05S)
• EIA camera connector pin assignments for connectors 1 and 2 on the IV-S30EA1
91
8 02
7 w q3
6 4
5
12-pin round connector (female): Made by Hirose Electric
Pin
No.
Signal
name
1 GND
2 +12 V
Signal type (input/output)
INT (internally synchronized mode) EXT (externally synchronized mode)
-
-
3 Image GND
4 Image signal
Input
Input
5 HD GND
6 HD
Input
Output
7 VD
Input
Output
8 TRIG GND
9 TRG signal
High impedance state
Output
10 GND
11 Not connected
Not connected
12 VD GND
- When only one EIA camera is used, make sure to connect it to connector 1 (CAMERA1).
5-33
Connection and Installation Methods
[3] Installing the IV-S30EA1
The bottom of the IV-S30EA1 camera converter should be installed by securing it on another surface
with the two mounting brackets that come with the IV-S30EA1.
IV-S30EA1
Mounting bracket
Installation surface
(1) Installation procedures
1 Install the two mounting brackets on the bottom of the IV-S30EA1. Use the 4 screws (M3 x 6) that
come with the IV-S30EA1.
2 mounting brackets
5
View from the bottom
Screw installation
positions (4)
2 Secure the unit on the installation surface using the mounting brackets.
5
5
79
15
(Unit: mm)
CAMERA2
CAMERA1
Installation
positions (4)
IV-S30EA1
POWER
100
70
+24V
0V
15
FG
CONTROLLER
89
Mounting bracket
The external dimensions of the IV-S30EA1 and mounting brackets are shown on the next page.
5-34
Connection and Installation Methods
- External dimensions of the
IV-S30EA1
70
25
(Unit: mm)
CAMERA2
INT
MODE
100
100
0V
100
IV-S30EA1
POWER
+24V
EXT
CAMERA1
FG
CONTROLLER
70
25
25
70
70
- External dimensions of main housing angle bracket
(Unit: mm)
2 holes 3.2 mm in diameter
(for attaching the bracket to the controller)
81
5
70
10.5
10
5
10
11
23
5
1.6
5.7
4.5
10.5
91
Mounting position
(2 places: for securing the bracket to the mounting surface)
5-35
5
Connection and Installation Methods
(2) Installation example
238
11
1
79
89
CAMERA2
IV-S33M
controller
(Unit: mm)
CAMERA1
15
138
148
INPUT
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
X3
Y3
X4
Y4
X5
Y5
X6
Y6
X7
Y7
COM +24V
READY COM
OUTPUT
IV-S33M
0V
POWER
IV-S30EA1
POWER
+24V
0V
FG
VIDEO
CAMERA1
CAMERA2
USB
RS232C/RS422
REMOTE
70
100
X0
Y0
CONTROLLER
5
IV-S30EA1
1
2
*Main interface cable
* The main interface cable should not be bent to a radius smaller than 40 mm.
(External dimensions of the main interface cable - See page 5-32.)
5-36
Connection and Installation Methods
[4] Wiring of the IV-S30EA1
Connecting a power supply
Connect a commercially available constant-voltage power supply to the power terminals (POWER: +24
V, 0 V) on the IV-S30EA1. Use a 24 VDC ± 10%, 500 mA or more constant-voltage power supply.
- Use an individual and dedicated power supply to supply power to the IV-S30EA1. If the power supply
is used to power other equipment, measurement errors may occur.
- Check the polarity of the power supply terminals, +24 V and 0 V. If power is supplied with the polarity
inverted, the controller may be damaged.
- Only connect or disconnect the camera cable and other equipment while the power is OFF.
This distance must be
as short as possible.
(Recommended distance:
less than 1 m)
5
Power supply terminal
(POWER: + 24V)
CAMERA2
CAMERA1
IV-S30EA1
DC24V
(−) (+)
Power supply terminal
(POWER: 0V)
IV-S30EA1
+24V
POWER
0V
FG
Constant-voltage
power supply
Fuse
(1A)
Frame ground
terminal
CONTROLLER
Note: To improve the noise resistance of the constant-voltage power supply connected to the
IV-S30EA1, observe the following precautions.
- Ground the FG terminal of the constant-voltage power supply according to the class 3
grounding.
- The power line between the IV-S30EA1 and the constant-voltage power supply must be as
short as possible. (Recommended distance: less than 1 m)
Do not run the power supply line near any noise generating sources, such as electric motor
lines.
- Use twisted-pair wire for the power supply line.
5-37
Setting and Operating Outlines
Chapter 6: Setting and Operating Outlines
6-1 Setting and operating procedures
The setting and operating procedures are outlined below.
1 System design
- Measurement program (positional deviation
measurement, degree of match inspection, etc.)
- Number of cameras, externally connected devices,
system components
- Input/output (start measurement input, result
output, object type change, etc.)
- Lighting equipment, illumination, shutter speed, lens, etc.
(Ref. chapter)
1-2 Measurement programs
3-1 Basic system configuration
3-2 System configuration examples
5-1 Installation conditions
2 Installation/assembly
- Connection of cameras and monitor to the controller
- Installation of the controller and camera body
- Connection of a power supply, input/output terminals
and external devices
5-2 to 5-4 Connection and installation
and wiring methods
6
3 Turning ON the power supply (controller and monitor)
4 Menu selection
- Select either the standard menus or the simplified menus.
5 Environment settings
- Input/output conditions related to external devices
(Method for starting measurements, communication
conditions, etc.)
- Operating conditions
(Method for capturing images and displaying the
measurement results)
6 Setting the conditions for each object type
æ Standard menus
æ Simplified menus
- Specify object type No.
- Specify object type No.
- Edit (copy and initialization)
- Enter the shutter speed
- Setting measurement
- Enter the measurement
program conditions
conditions
(measurement 0 to 3)
- Enter the evaluation
- Setting positional correction
conditions
"YES/NO"
- Enter the positional
- Setting all of the system
correction (Existence
numerical calculations
inspection)
- Setting final output conditions
- System/input/output settings
6-2 Standard menus and simplified
menus
æ Simplified menus
Chapter 7: Simplified Menu
Operation
(See "7-3 Setting procedures"
item.)
æ Standard menus
See the User’s Manual
(Function and Operation)
7 Operation
8 Test/inspection
User’s Manual
(Function and Operation)
9 Maintenance
6-1
Setting and Operating Outlines
6-2 Standard menus and simplified menus
The IV-S30 has two types of main menu configurations: standard menus and simplified menue. The
standard menus have all of the functions available which are presented to the operator. The simplified
menus make it easy to set up position and existence inspections
Standard menus
Menu selection
Positioning
Simplified menus
Existence inspection
Major differences between the standard menus and the simplified menus
6
Measurement program
Item
Number of menu layers
Positional deviation
measurement
(Positioning)
Area measurement by
binary conversion
(Existence inspection)
Degree of match
inspection
Lead inspection
BGA/CSP inspection
Object counting by
binary conversion
Object identification
(labeling) by binary
conversion
Point measurement
Multiple position
measurement
Multiple degree of
match inspection
Distance and angle
measurement
Positional correction
Register/display NG images
PC function
Numerical calculation
function
Standard menus
Three layers
Number of registers: 8
1-point search, 2-point search, 1-point
edge, 2-point edge
1-point search + 1-point edge
Number of registers: 16
Definable rectangular, circular, and
elliptical areas.
Enable mask window and noise filter.
Simplified menus
Two layers
Number of registers: 1
1-point search, 2-point search
Number of registers: 8
Only rectangular area is definable.
Mask window and noise filter setting
not possible.
Yes
No
Yes
Yes (IV-S32M/S33M)
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
XY correction, angular correction
XY correction (existence inspection)
Yes (IV-S32M/S33M)
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Relationship of the data between the standard menus and the simplified menus
The data entered in the simplified menus will be saved when the screen is changed to the standard
menus. The data set up in the standard menus will be initialized when the screen is changed to the
simplified menus (the settings will be lost). The table below describes the relation between the data
entered in the standard menus and in the simplified menus.
Simplified menus
Measurement
details
Positioning
Camera
selection
Camera
Camera 1 Camera 1
Camera 1 Camera 1
&2
Camera 2
Camera 1 Camera 1
Existence
inspection
Camera 1
(Deviation amount Camera 1
&
2
Camera 2
for XY correction)
C
a
m
e
r
a
1
Camera 1
Existence
inspection
(Binary area)
Camera 1 Camera 1
&2
Camera 2
Standard menu
Register
number
-
MEASUREMENT 0 CAMERA 1
MEASUREMENT 0 CAMERA 1
MEASUREMENT 0 CAMERA 2
MEASUREMENT 0 CAMERA 1
-
MEASUREMENT 0 CAMERA 1
-
MEASUREMENT 0 CAMERA 2
0 to 7
MEASUREMENT 1 CAMERA 1
Measurement number
0 to 7
MEASUREMENT 1 CAMERA 1
0 to 7
MEASUREMENT 1 CAMERA 2
Measuring
program
Positional
deviation
measurement
Positional
deviation
measurement
(XY correction)
Area
measurement
after binary
conversion
Register
number
0
0
0 to 7
The object type numbers (IV-S31M: 0 to 15, IV-S32M: 0 to 31, IV-S33M: 0 to 63) are also shared by both
types of menu configurations.
6-2
Setting and Operating Outlines
[1] Menu configuration
(1) Standard menu configuration
First layer
(MAIN OPS MENU)
Second layer
(Upper and lower, two window style)
Upper screen
MAIN OPS MENU
EVALUATION
COND CHANGE
PC MONITOR
NG-IMG-DSP
SYSTEM COND
Lower screen
TYPE RUN COND
/O CONDITIONS
SET COMM PARAM
COMPUTER LINK
GAIN-OFFSET
TYPE MEAS COND
(each object type)
IMG PRE-PROCESS
MEASUREMENT 0
CAMERA 1
MEASUREMENT 0
CAMERA 2
POSITION
CORRECTION
MEASUREMENT
1 to 4
TITLE registration
I/O for each object type
SYSTEM for each
object type
(2) Simplified menu configuration (positioning)
First layer
(MAIN OPS MENU)
Second layer
(Upper and lower, two window style)
Upper screen
MAIN OPS MENU
SYSTEM COND
MEASUREMENT
RESULT
TYPE RUN COND
Lower screen
SET COMM PARAM
COMPUTER LINK
EVALUATION
COND SETTING
OBJ TYPE
SETTING
POSITIONING
CONDITIONS
SHUTTER SPEED
(3) Simplified menu configuration (existence inspection)
First layer
(MAIN OPS MENU)
Second layer
(Upper and lower, two window style)
Upper screen
MAIN OPS MENU
SYSTEM COND
MEASUREMENT
RESULT
TYPE RUN COND
Lower screen
SET COMM PARAM
COMPUTER LINK
EVALUATION
COND SETTING
OBJ TYPE
SETTING
SHUTTER SPEED
Third layer
EXISTENCE
INSPECTION COND
POSITIONAL
CORRECTION COND
6-3
ADJ. IMAGE BRIGHT
CHANGE LIGHT LEVEL
COMPARE IMAGES
MASK BINARY IMAGE
GRAY-SCALE COND
EDGE DETECT COND
BINARY AREA COND
EVALUATION COND
(including serial
output settings)
DISTANCE&ANGLE
COND
NUMERIC CALC COND
OUTPUT COND
FINAL CALC COND
FINAL OUTPUT COND
CCD TRIGGER COND
LIGHT LEVEL COND
6
Setting and Operating Outlines
[2] Method for selecting the menu configuration
(1) When power is first turned ON after the machine is delivered
When power is first turned ON after the machine is delivered, the [SELECT MENU] screen will
appear.
Power ON
1 To select the standard menus configuration
1. Move the cursor to the [1STANDARD MENU]
item with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The standard mode [MAIN OPS MENU] screen
will appear.
[SELECT MENU]
[SELECT MENU]
1STANDARD MENU
2SIMPLIFIED MENU
(STD RUN-MENU)
(SEL EASY MENU)
(TYPE00)
2 To select the simplified menus
configuration
1. Move the cursor to the [2
SIMPLIFIED MENU] item with the
up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The [SIMPLIFIED MENU] screen
will appear.
F.IMG C1 H
VX.XX
MEAS 0000ms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE0 CAM1 NO
[SIMPLIFIED MENU]
6
[SIMPLIFIED MENU]
1MEAS OBJ
POSITIONING EXISTENCE
2SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM1&2
3XY CORRECTION NO YES
1. Move the cursor to the item you want to set
with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
2. Move the cursor to the item you want to
specify with the left and right keys, and press
the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the OPS-MENU item with
the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- The [MAIN OPS MENU] screen will appear.
F.IMG C1 H
VX.XX
MEAS 0000ms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
X0~7
READY
16 ×
17 ×
18 ×
19 ×
20 ×
21 ×
22 ×
23 ×
24 ×
25 ×
26 ×
27 ×
28 ×
29 ×
30 ×
31 ×
Y0~7
32 ×
33 ×
34 ×
35 ×
36 ×
37 ×
38 ×
39 ×
When the [1MEAS OBJ] is set to
[EXISTENCE], [3 XY CORRECTION] item
is displayed. Select "YES" to execute an XY
correction.
Existence inspection (CAMERA 1 & 2, XY correction: YES)
Positioning (CAMERA 1 & 2)
(TYPE00)
08 ×
09 ×
10 ×
11 ×
12 ×
13 ×
14 ×
15 ×
Y0~7
CHG-MEA CHG-REG CHG-RST CHG-C1 CHG-C2 CHG-EVAL CUSTOM-MNU
OPS-CND SYS-CND SYS-CND CHG-TYPE NEXT-NG RE-EXAM-NG MANL-MEAS
Camera 1: Use only CAMERA 1
Camera 1& 2: Use both CAMERA 1 and CAMERA 2
OPS-MENU
00 ×
01 ×
02 ×
03 ×
04 ×
05 ×
06 ×
07 ×
X0~7
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 H
VX.XX
MEAS 0000ms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT POSITION CORRECTION
40 ×
41 ×
42 ×
43 ×
44 ×
45 ×
46 ×
47 ×
48 ×
49 ×
50 ×
51 ×
52 ×
53 ×
54 ×
55 ×
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
*
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
00 ×
01 ×
02 ×
03 ×
04 ×
05 ×
06 ×
07 ×
X0~7
SEL-CAMERA
08 ×
09 ×
10 ×
11 ×
12 ×
13 ×
14 ×
15 ×
16 ×
17 ×
18 ×
19 ×
20 ×
21 ×
22 ×
23 ×
24 ×
25 ×
26 ×
27 ×
28 ×
29 ×
30 ×
31 ×
Y0~7
32 ×
33 ×
34 ×
35 ×
36 ×
37 ×
38 ×
39 ×
40 ×
41 ×
42 ×
43 ×
44 ×
45 ×
46 ×
47 ×
48 ×
49 ×
50 ×
51 ×
52 ×
53 ×
54 ×
55 ×
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
*
READY
CHG-TYPE AUX-COND AUX-EVAL. EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
* For the IV-S33M
- For details about the method for using the simplified menus, see Chapter 7, "Simplified Menu
Operation."
- For details about the method for using the standard menus, see the User’s Manual (Function
and Operation).
Notes
- If you have saved the configuration data in flash memory by selecting the "SAVE" item, the
next time you turn ON the power, the menu configuration you selected will be displayed
automatically.
6-4
Setting and Operating Outlines
(2) Changing the screen from the standard menus to the simplified menus configuration
Move the cursor to the "SYS-CND" item on the MAIN OPS MENU screen, and press the SET key.
[SYSTEM COND]
1I/O CONDITIONS (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
2COMM.SET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3COMPUTER LINK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
4INITIALIZATION ALL-INIT INIT-RAM
5STD→SELECT MENU EXEC
[SELECT MENU]
1STANDARD MENU
2SIMPLIFIED MENU
(STD RUN-MENU)
(SEL EASY MENU)
Notes
1. Move the cursor to the "5STD → SELECT
MENU" item on the [SYSTEM COND] menu,
and press the SET key.
2. Select the "EXEC" item, and press the SET
key. The [SELECT MENU] screen will appear.
1. Move the cursor to the "2SIMPLIFIED MENU"
item with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The [SIMPLIFIED MENU] screen will
appear.
2. As described on the previous page, select each
item that you want to specify, and press the
SET key.
- Make sure to SAVE the system configuration data after you change from the standard menus
to the simplified menus configuration. Otherwise, your selection of the simplified menus
configuration will be ignored the next time you turn ON the power.
- When you change the IV-S30 configuration from the standard menus to the simplified menus,
the data will be saved into the RAM.
(3) Changing from the simplified menus to the standard menus configuration
Move the cursor to the "SYS-CND" item on the MAIN OPS MENU screen, and press the SET key.
[SYSTEM COND]
1SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
2COMM.SET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3COMPUTER LINK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
4INITIALIZATION ALL-INIT INIT-RAM
5SIMPLE MENU→STD EXEC
1. Move the cursor to the "5 SIMPLE MENU →
STD" item on the [SYSTEM COND] menu, and
press the SET key.
2. Select the "EXEC" item, and press the SET key.
The [SELECT MENU] screen will appear.
1. Move the cursor to the "1STANDARD MENU"
item with the up and down keys, and press the SET
(STD RUN-MENU)
key.
(SEL EASY MENU)
- The [MAIN OPS MENU] screen with the
standard menus will appear.
To select whether "POSITIONING" or "EXISTENCE" is displayed on the simplified menus, select the
[2 SIMPLIFIED MENU] item on the [SELECT MENU] screen, and specify each item you want to
appear on the simplified menus.
[SELECT MENU]
1STANDARD MENU
2SIMPLIFIED MENU
Notes
- Make sure to SAVE the system configuration data after you change from the simplified menus
to standard menus configuration. Otherwise, your selection of the standard menus
configuration will be ignored the next time you turn ON the power.
- The items that you selected for display on the simplified menus will be saved when the screen
configuration is changed to the standard menus. (See page 6-2.)
6-5
6
Setting and Operating Outlines
6-3 Power on setting menu
Follow the procedure described below when turning ON the power to the IV-S31M/S32M/S33M
controller, and the [POWER ON SETTING] menu will be displayed on the monitor.
1. Turn ON the power to the controller, while holding down the ESC key.
2. Keep pressing the ESC key down for approx. 9 sec., after turning ON the power and the menu will be
displayed.
[POWER ON SETTING]
1 MAIN OPS MENU UNLOCK LOCK
2 DISPLAY MODE JAPANESE ENGLISH
3 OPERATION
[1] Operations menu lock
To prevent accidental changes to conditions you have set, the MAIN OPS MENU can be locked so that
the screen cannot be changed to SET-SCRN. The operation can only be carried out on the [POWER ON
SETTIN] menu.
6
Operation procedure
1. On the [POWER ON SETTING] menu, move the cursor to item 1MAIN OPS MENU with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to UNLOCK or LOCK with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to item 3OPERATION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key. Press
the SET key once more.
- The IV-S30 saves the settings in the flash memory and the screen will return to the SELECT
MENU.
1 MAIN OPS MENU
UNLOCK
LOCK
Description
All of the operating conditions for the
IV-S30 can be changed.
The MAIN OPS MENU is locked and
no change can be made.
Display when the MAIN OPS MENU is locked
(TYPE00)
OK
T.IMG C1 L
LOCK FULL VX.X
This is only
displayed when
using the IV-S33M
MEAS XXXXXXms
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION
"LOCK" will be
displayed on the
MAIN OPS MENU
[2] Change the Japanese or English display mode
The language used on the screen scan be set to Japanese or English. Select the [POWER ON SETTING]
menu.
Operation procedure
1. Move the cursor to item 2DISPLAY MODE with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to JAPANESE or ENGLISH with the left and right keys.
3. Move the cursor to item 3OPERATION with the up and down keys, and press the SET key. Press
the SET key once more.
- The screan will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
6-6
Setting and Operating Outlines
6-4 Camera setting
The cameras that can be connected to IV-S31M/S32M/S33M controllers are as follows:
Controller
Connectable cameras
IV-S31M
IV-S30C1 Standard camera
IV-S30C2 Micro camera
IV-S32M
IV-S30C1 Standard camera
IV-S30C2 Micro camera
IV-S33M * 1
IV-S30C3 High-speed camera
IV-S30C4 Micro, high-speed camera
EIA camera (commercially available)
* You cannot use different types of cameras at the same time with the same controller (standard, highspeed and EIA cameras cannot be mixed).
[1] For the IV-S31M/S32M
Only IV-S30C1/C2 standard cameras can be connected to the IV-S31M/S32M controllers. These
controllers do not have settings for the type of camera connected to it.
6
[2] For the IV-S33M
An IV-S30C1/C2 standard camera, IV-S30C3/C4 high-speed camera, or commercially available EIA
cameras can be connected to the IV-S33M. Select the camera type (camera synchronization, image
capture mode) in the "CAMERA TYPE" item on the [SYSTEM COND] menu to match the type of camera
you have connected.
IV-S30C3 (high-speed)
EIA camera
IV-S30C1 (standard)
Camera connected
IV-S30C4 (micro and
(commercialIV-S30C2 (micro)
high-speed)
ly available)
Camera selection
Standard
High-speed
EIA
CAMERA Camera
Externally or
synchronization
TYPE
----internally
(SYSTEM - See (2) below
synchronized
COND) Image capture mode
--Full or half, full + half
Full or half
- See (1) below
- For details about finding the setting screens above, see page 7-31 for the simple menu and read the
"Camera settings" section of the IV-S30 (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) User’s Manual, Function and Operation
for details about the standard menu.
(1) Image capture mode
When you are using the IV-S30C3/C4 high-speed camera or an EIA camera, you have to select an
image capture mode.
Image capture mode
Details
Full
Capture all of the lines in the image
Half
Capture the odds lines in the image
In the partial image mode, the measurement target lines
Full + half * 2
are in full mode and the others are in half mode
* 2 "Full + half" mode can only be selected when it is a high-speed camera.
- For a comparison of the image capture times, see page 7-32.
6-7
Setting and Operating Outlines
(2) Camera synchronization
When an EIA camera is used, you have to set the camera synchronization mode (internal or external
synchronization).
1 Internal and external synchronization details
1. Internal synchronization
This mode uses the CCD image capture timing inside the camera, and captures images
automatically.
- To send a captured image to the IV-S33M, first the IV-S33M must send a trigger to the
camera. Then the camera will wait until the first line from its CCD is being read to begin the
capture and image transmission. Due to this process (camera synchronization time + monitor
output synchronization time), the shutter time may fluctuate (maximun: 33.3 + 16.6 ms).
- When two cameras are connected, camera 1 and camera 2 cannot both open their shutters at
the same time. Therefore, there will be a difference in shutter timing as described above.
2. External synchronization
The IV-S33M controls the shutter speed and trigger timing in order to capture images. See the
next page for the internal/external synchronization timing charts.
• External synchronization and internal synchronization processing
6
External synchronization
Settable from the IV-S33M
Fixed value (depends on the shutter
- Fluctuates with the camera
speed)
synchronization time and the monitor - When the shutter speed is 1/120, this
Shutter speed
output synchronization time (maximum value is 8.3 ms
49.9 ms for each camera)
- Setting range varies with the camera
connected.
Shutter time
Internal synchronization
Fixed by the camera design
• Shutter speeds of the recommended cameras
Tokyo Electronics
Industry CS8320B
Internal synchronization 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000
Shutter (selected on the camera) 1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000
1/2000, 1/4000, 1/10000
speeds
External synchronization 1/100 to 1/1600
1/125 to 1/1500
Cameras recommended
Sony XC-75
2 Setting the IV-S30EA1 and IV-S33M for use with an EIA camera
Set the IV-S30EA1 camera converter, and the IV-S33M controller to internal or external
synchronization, to match the EIA camera you have.
Item
EIA camera
IV-S30EA1 mode
switch (MODE)
IV-S33M camera
setting (system
condition)
Setting details
For internal synchronization For external synchronization
Set to "Internal
Set to "External
Synchronization" mode
Synchronization" mode
Reference
*
INT
EXT
Page 4-4
Camera Selection: EIA
Camera Synchronization:
Internal Synchronization
Camera Selection: EIA
Camera Synchronization:
External Synchronization
Page 7-31
*For example, set the Tokyo Electronics Industries CS8320B camera dip switches as follows:
Function [Dip switch
SW4]
γ correction [1]
CCD storage mode [2]
Restart and reset [3]
Special shutter [4]
VD output/FLD output [6]
Use Internal
Synchronization
OFF
OFF (frame storage)
OFF
OFF
OFF (VD output)
6-8
Use External
Synchronization
OFF
ON (field storage)
ON
ON
OFF (VD output)
Setting and Operating Outlines
3 Timing chart
Internal synchronization
Trigger input
Monitor output
vertical
synchronization
Wait for monitor to output vertical synchronization signal (maximum 16.6 ms)
Camera
reading top line
Waiting for camera to read the top line (maximum 33.3 ms)
Shutter open
Wait time (maximum 49.9 ms)
Image data transfer
(CCD→VRAM)
Image data transfer
(VRAM→SDRAM)
6
External synchronization
Trigger input
Shutter open
Exposure time
Image data
transfer
(CCD→VRAM)
Image data transfer
(VRAM→SDRAM)
Note: When an EIA camera is used, the last (lowest) line (line 479) may not be captured
successfully due to some camera’s characteristics.
6-9
Simplified Menu Operation
Chapter 7: Simplified Menu Operation
7-1 Operation screen
When the simplified menus are selected, supply power to the controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M), and the
MAIN OPS MENU (startup screen) will be displayed on the monitor. (For details about the settings on the
simplified menus, see page 6-4.)
- Before applying the power, make sure that the power cable, monitor cable, camera cables, and
remote key pad have been connected to the controller.
Ë The operation screen for "Positioning"
1
2
6
5
7
8
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L ●
LOCK FULL VX.XX ■
OK
3
4
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
Display contents
- Object type selection
- Shutter speed
- Measurement results
- Evaluation conditions
7
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
SEL-CAMERA
Ë The operation screen for an "Existence inspection"
1
2
6
5
7
F.IMG C1 L ●
LOCK FULL VX.XX ■
(TYPE00)
OK
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT 1 EXISTENCE
Display contents
- Object type selection
- Shutter speed
- Measurement results
- Evaluation conditions
X0~7
8
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE
EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
7-1
3
4
Simplified Menu Operation
1 Object type No. (00 to 15: IV-S31M, 00 to 31: IV-S32M, 00 to 63 : IV-S33M)
2 Final evaluation result
Display
Description
OK
NG
"OK" is displayed when all of the individual evaluation results are acceptable.
"NG" is displayed if any single evaluation result is unacceptable.
(Error
message)
An error code and the measurement number that caused the error are
displayed on the upper line. The error message is displayed on the lower line.
3 F C1 L ●
Actively operating:
Image brightness:
Flashing
H = Original brightness of captured image
L = Brightness reduced to half that in the captured image
Output monitor status: C1 = Camera 1, C2 = Camera 2
Image display mode: F = Freeze mode
T = Through mode (raw image)
4 LOCK FULL VX.X ■
7
Flashes during communications
System program version number
Image scanning mode (this is only displayed on the IV-S33M)
: FULL = full mode, HALF = half mode, F + H = full and half mode
Lock the MAIN OPS MENU (operation screen)
("LOCK" is not displayed while the screen is unlocked. See page 6-6.)
5 Measurement No. (0 to 2), Camera No. (1 or 2), and the measurement to be carried out
POSITIONING: MEAS 0 CAM 1 or MEAS 0 CAM 2
POS-CORRECT: MEAS 0 CAM 1 or MEAS 0 CAM 2
EXISTENCE:
MEAS 1 CAM 1 or MEAS 2 CAM 2
6 Measuring time
- The screen shows the measuring time determined by the following (from measurement start to
measurement end).
Actual measuring time
(Only when changing the type)
Image
Type change CCD exposure time CCD image
Measurement result
(Shutter speed)
capture time processing time
time
display time
- The measuring time does not include the serial communication time.
- To decrease the measuring time:
1. Increase the shutter speed (page 7-12),
2. Change the CCD image capture mode (CAPTURE AN IMAGE) to PARTIAL-IMG (see page
7-7), and
3. Set the result displays (MESSAGE DISPLAY, PATTERN DISPLAY, SHOW BINARY IMG) to
"NO" (see page 7-8 to 7-10).
7 Measurement result
- After you save* the specified conditions, the settings for the "Measured result screen" and
"Image brightness: H/L" on the MAIN OPS MENU (operation screen) will be kept in memory,
even when the power is turned OFF and ON again.
* To store the data, select "SAVE" on the menu bar.
7-2
Simplified Menu Operation
8 Menu bar
Menu bar
Description
CHG-TYPE
Change or register an object type.
Go to the positioning condition setting
screen.
Set the positioning evaluation
conditions
Go to the position correction condition
setting screen used in the existence
inspection mode.
Specify the position correction
evaluation conditions used in the
existence inspection mode.
Go to the setting screen for specifying
the existence inspection conditions.
Specify the existence inspection
evaluation conditions.
Switch the setting and the monitor
display image between Camera1 and
Camera 2 by pressing the SET key.
Go to the OPS SET MENU setup
screen.
Go to the SYSTEM COND setup
screen.
Change the image brightness between
"L" and "H," by pressing the SET key.
Store the evaluation and measurement
conditions, such as reference images,
in the flash memory.
Specify the shutter speed.
POSI-COND
POSI-EVAL
AUX-COND
AUX-EVAL.
EXIST-COND
EXIST-EVAL.
SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND
SYS-CND
ADJCONTRAST
SAVE
SHUTTER
Existence Existence
inspection inspection Reference
Positioning
(with
(without
pages
correction) correction)
7-11
●
●
●
7-14
●
to 7-16
7-17
●
●
7-23
●
7-24
●
●
7-18
to 7-22
●
●
7-22
●
●
●
7-5
●
●
●
●
●
●
7-7
to 7-10
7-27
to 7-30
●
●
●
7-4
●
●
●
7-26
●
●
●
7-12
[Image display area]
The size of the area where the image is displayed on the monitor is 512 (horizontal) pixels ×480
(vertical) pixels.
512
Y axis
480
X axis
Origin (0, 0)
(Unit: pixels)
(511, 479)
7-3
7
Simplified Menu Operation
7-2 Image display
[1] Image display modes
There are two image display modes, i.e. through (moving images) and freeze (still images).
Display
mode
Through
Freeze
Description
- Raw images taken by the specified camera are displayed on the monitor.
- This mode is used for adjusting the camera focus, adjusting an image, and moving
a workpiece during testing.
- When a measurement trigger is input, and an image is captured, the still image is
displayed on the monitor.
- This mode is used for setting measurement conditions, while looking at the still
image, and for performing settings on the MAIN OPS MENU.
Ë Changing operation
To change the image display mode between "freeze" and "through," use the SEL key on the remote
keypad (IV-S30RK1).
[MAIN OPS MENU]
(TYPE00)
OK
[Setting screen]
F.IMG C1 H
VX.X
1REGISTER NO.
T.IMG C1 H
VX.X
0(0~7) NO YES
MEAS XXXXXXms
MEASURE1CAM1 POSITIONING
7
In "Through" mode
In "Freeze" mode
Notes
- To register a reference image for gray scale searches
If these operations are started in the through mode, the message "CHANGE TO FREEZE
MODE" will be displayed. Before starting these operations, change to the image F mode
(freeze display mode).
[2] Adjustment of image brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted on any setting screen (other than the run screen) shown on the
monitor.
- Purpose
This function is used when the image is so bright that the characters and pattern display are difficult to
see.
- Status display
The brightness level, "H" or "L," is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
Level
Description
display
The image captured by the camera is displayed at its original brightness.
H
The image captured by the camera is displayed at half the brightness of the original.
L
Ë How to change the contrast
On the MAIN OPS MENU:
Move the cursor to the "ADJ-CONTRAST" item using the left and
right keys, and press the SET key.
On the contrast setting screen: Use the TRG/BRT key on the remote keypad to set the contrast (IVS30RK1).
7-4
Simplified Menu Operation
[3] Changing cameras
When two cameras have been connected to the controller, select the camera whose image will be
displayed on the monitor.
You can display images from two cameras at the same time by selecting "CAM1&2" in the "2 SELECT
CAMERA" column on the [SIMPLIFIED MENU].
[SIMPLIFIED MENU]
1MEAS OBJ
POSITIONING EXISTENCE
2SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM1&2
3XY CORRECTION NO YES
Use both Camera 1 and Camera 2.
OPS-MENU
Ë How to change cameras
Move the cursor to the "SEL-CAMERA" item using the left and right keys on the MAIN OPS MENU,
and press the SET key.
C1: Camera 1
C2: Camera 2
[MAIN OPS MENU]
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 H
VX.X
OK
7
MEAS XXXXXXms
MEASUREMENT 1 EXISTENCE
The camera number that you specify on this menu will also be used for setting the measurement
and evaluation conditions.
7-3 Setting functions that are different with each controller
The setting functions which depend on the individual controllers (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) on the simplified
menu are as follows:
Item
IV-S31M IV-S32M IV-S33M
Reference page (item)
Number of object types
16
32
64
7-11 (Operation screen)
that can be registered
7-31, 7-32 (camera selection, image
Camera setting
capture mode, camera synchronize)
Timer setting
7-27, 7-30 (system conditions)
(-: Unavailable, O: Available)
- For details about the standard menu, see the "IV-S30 User’s Manual, Function and Operation, Ver.
2.0."
7-5
Simplified Menu Operation
7-4 Setting procedures
The flow charts shown below outline the setting procedures on the simplified menus.
Positioning
1 Menu selection
- Select "SIMPLIFIED MENU."
- Select "POSITIONING."
- Specify the camera number to use.
2 Camera settings (when the IV-S33M is
used)
- Select camera
- Image capture mode
7
Existence inspection
(Reference
pages)
6-2 to 5
7-31
3 Setting the communication conditions
- The presence or absence of serial output.
- Specify the communication parameters.
- Specify the computer link settings.
7-27 and 28
Only when
using serial
communicatio.
4 Select a method for capturing images.
7-7
5 Specify the display details on the
MAIN OPS MENU.
- The presence or absence of the message
display. - The presence or absence of the pattern
display.
- Enable or disable the binary image
display.
7-8 to 10
6 Specify the object type.
7-11
7 Select a camera.
- When CAM 1 is selected, the SELCAMERA item is not displayed.
7-5
8 Specify the shutter speed.
7-12
9 Specify the measurement conditions
for positioning.
- Select either a 1-point or 2-point search.
- Specify a reference image area.
- Specify a search area.
7-13 to 16
0 Specify the evaluation conditions for
positioning
7-17
q Save the data.
w Start the measurement operation
(Reference
pages)
1 Menu selection
- Select "SIMPLIFIED MENU."
- Select "POSITIONING."
- Specify the camera number to use.
- Select whether or not to make an XY
correction.
6-2 to 5
2 Camera settings (when the IV-S33M is
used)
- Select camera
- Image capture mode
7-31
3 Setting the communication conditions
- The presence or absence of serial output.
- Specify the communication parameters.
- Specify the computer link settings.
7-27 and 28
Only when
using serial
communicatio.
4 Select a method for capturing images.
7-7
5 Specify the display details on the
MAIN OPS MENU.
- The presence or absence of the message
display. - The presence or absence of the pattern
display.
- Enable or disable the binary image
display.
7-8 to 10
6 Specify the object type.
7-11
7 Select a camera.
- When CAM 1 is selected, the SELCAMERA item is not displayed.
7-5
8 Specify the shutter speed.
7-12
Without correction
With correction
9 Specify the measurement conditions
for position correction.
- Select yes or not on the register line.
- Specify a reference image area.
- Specify a search area.
7-23
0 Specify the evaluation conditions for
position correction
7-24
7-26
7-25 and 26
q Specify the measurement conditions
for existence inspection.
- Enter a register number
- Specify a measurement area.
- Enter a threshold value.
7-18 to 22
e Save the data.
7-26
w Specify the evaluation conditions for
an existence inspection.
r Start the measurement operation.
7-25 and 26
7-6
7-22
Simplified Menu Operation
7-5 Setting the operation conditions
[1] Image capture
Specify the range of lines which will be captured during operation.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to the "OPS-CND" item, and press the SET key.
[TYPE RUN COND]
1CAPTURE IMG
2MESSAGE DISPLAY
3PATTERN DISPLAY
4SHOW BINARY IMG
PARTIAL-IMG WHOLE-IMG NO
YES(NUMERIC) YES(NO NUMERIC) NO
YES NO
YES NO
1 CAPTURE AN IMAGE
Description
- An image consisting of only the specified line, required for
inspection or measurement, will be captured.
- The number of lines is determined by the mesurement window
setting.
- The processing time of a partial image is shorter than in the
WHOLE-IMG mode.
PARTIAL-IMG
(partial image)
- A whole image will be captured, irrespective of the window
settings for inspection or measurement.
- This mode is used to monitor portions of an image outside the
window set up for inspection or measurement.
Note: When the IV-S33M is used and "FULL+HALF" is selected
for the image capture mode (see page 7-31), it will
process the whole area in the full mode.
- No image will be captured during operation. Measurements will
be carried out with an image currently being displayed.
- This mode is only used to carry out measurements on an image
transmitted from a personal computer to the IV-S30.
WHOLE-IMG
(whole image)
NO
(no image)
Ë Operation procedure
1. On the [TYPE RUN CND] (shown above), move the cursor to the "1 CAPTURE IMG" item with
the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "PARTIAL-IMG," "WHOLE-IMG" or "NO" with the left and right keys, and press
the SET key.
Ë Example of a comparison of the capture times
・When "WHOLEIMG" is specified
IV-S33M
16.7 ms (high-speed camera and full mode)
8.3 ms (high-speed camera and half mode)
33.3 ms (standard camera)
33.3 ms (standard camera)
IV-S31M/S32M
Whole image reading
480 lines
(approx. 33 ms)
- Image capture mode (full/half mode)
-See page 7-31
・When "PARTIAL-IMG" is specified: (When 240 scan lines is specified)
IV-S33M
IV-S31M/S32M
8.3 ms (high-speed camera and full mode)*
4.2 ms (high-speed camera and half mode)*
12.5 ms (high-speed camera and full + half mode)*
16.6 ms (standard camera)
16.6 ms (standard camera)
Partial image reading
240 lines
(approx. 8 ms)
* The image capture time may vary with the
position of the partial image. (In the
example shown above, the maximum
variation is 0.4 ms)
7-7
7
Simplified Menu Operation
[2] Message display
Select "YES" or "NO" to display messages on the MAIN OPS MENU.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to the "OPS-CND" item, and press the SET key.
[TYPE RUN COND]
1CAPTURE IMG
2MESSAGE DISPLAY
3PATTERN DISPLAY
4SHOW BINARY IMG
PARTIAL-IMG WHOLE-IMG NO
YES(NUMERIC) YES(NO NUMERIC) NO
YES NO
YES NO
2 MESSAGE
DISPLAY
YES (NUMERIC)
YES (NO NUMERIC)
NO
7
Description
All information will be displayed.
Information other than the numerical results will be
displayed.
No messages will be displayed.
Selecting "NO" reduces the processing time.
YES (NUMERIC) > YES (NO NUMERIC) > NO
Ë Operation procedure
1. On the [TYPE RUN COND] , move the cursor to the item "2 MESSAGE DISPLAY" with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "YES (NUMERIC)," "YES (NO NUMERIC)" or "NO" with the left and right
keys, and press the SET key.
Ë Display examples
- When the message display mode has
- When the message display mode has
been set to YES (NO NUMERIC)
been set to YES (NUMERIC)
(TYPE00)
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
OK
OK
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
①X COORD.(MDL0)
②Y COORD.(MDL0)
③MATCH LVL(MDL0)
④X COORD.(MDL1)
⑤Y COORD.(MDL1)
⑥MATCH LVL(MDL1)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
000.0~511.0 X0=353.0 OK
000.0~479.0 Y0=120.0 OK
-10000~+10000 M0=+09620 OK
000.0~511.0 X1=452.0 OK
000.0~479.0 Y1=420.0 OK
-10000~+10000 M1=+09524 OK
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
- When the message display mode has
been set to NO
Press the SET
key.
Press the ESC
key.
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
7-8
Simplified Menu Operation
[3] Pattern display
Select "YES or NO," to determine whether to display windows and other markings over the working image
displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to the "OPS-CND" item, and press the SET key.
[TYPE RUN COND]
1CAPTURE IMG
2MESSAGE DISPLAY
3PATTERN DISPLAY
4SHOW BINARY IMG
PARTIAL-IMG WHOLE-IMG NO
YES(NUMERIC) YES(NO NUMERIC) NO
YES NO
YES NO
3 PATTERN
DISPLAY
Description
Patterns will be displayed on the [MAIN OPS MENU.]
YES
NO
Patterns will not be displayed on the [MAIN OPS MENU.]
Ë Operation procedure
1. On the [TYPE RUN COND], move the cursor to the item "3 PATTERN DISPLAY" item with the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "YES" or "NO" with the right and left keys, and press the SET key.
7
Ë Display examples
- When the pattern display mode has been
set to NO.
- When the pattern display mode has been
set to YES.
(TYPE00)
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
OK
OK
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
1X COORD.(MDL0)
2Y COORD.(MDL0)
3MATCH LVL(MDL0)
4X COORD.(MDL1)
5Y COORD.(MDL1)
6MATCH LVL(MDL1)
000.0~511.0
000.0~479.0
-10000~+10000
000.0~511.0
000.0~479.0
-10000~+10000
X0=353.0
Y0=120.0
M0=+09620
X1=452.0
Y1=420.0
M1=+09524
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
1X COORD.(MDL0)
2Y COORD.(MDL0)
3MATCH LVL(MDL0)
4X COORD.(MDL1)
5Y COORD.(MDL1)
6MATCH LVL(MDL1)
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
000.0~511.0
000.0~479.0
-10000~+10000
000.0~511.0
000.0~479.0
-10000~+10000
X0=353.0
Y0=120.0
M0=+09620
X1=452.0
Y1=420.0
M1=+09524
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
X0~7
Y0~7
X0~7
READY
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
7-9
Simplified Menu Operation
[4] Binary image display
Select "YES or NO" to display a binary image on the MAIN OPS MENU.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to "OPS-CND," and press the SET key.
[TYPE RUN COND]
1CAPTURE IMG
2MESSAGE DISPLAY
3PATTERN DISPLAY
4SHOW BINARY IMG
PARTIAL-IMG WHOLE-IMG NO
YES(NUMERIC) YES(NO NUMERIC) NO
YES NO
YES NO
4 SHOW BINARY
IMG
Description
YES
A binary image will be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
NO
A binary image will not be displayed on the MAIN OPS MENU.
The line "4SHOW BINARY IMG" will only be displayed when "3PATTERN
DISPLAY" is set to "YES."
7
Ë Operation procedure
1. On the [TYPE RUN COND], move the cursor to the "4 SHOW BINARY IMG" item with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "YES" or "NO" with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
Ë Display examples
- When "show binary image" has been set
to YES
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
OK
- When "show binary image" has been set
to NO
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
OK
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT 1 EXISTENCE
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT 1 EXISTENCE
1REG00 000000~245760 A00=018190 OK
2REG01 000000~245760 A01=
3REG02 000000~245760 A02=
4REG03 000000~245760 A03=
5REG04 000000~245760 A04=
6REG05 000000~245760 A05=
7REG06 000000~245760 A06=
8REG07 000000~245760 A07=
1REG00 000000~245760 A00=018190 OK
2REG01 000000~245760 A01=
3REG02 000000~245760 A02=
4REG03 000000~245760 A03=
5REG04 000000~245760 A04=
6REG05 000000~245760 A05=
7REG06 000000~245760 A06=
8REG07 000000~245760 A07=
X0~7
CHG-TYPE
Y0~7
READY
X0~7
EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
CHG-TYPE
Y0~7
READY
EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
7-10
Simplified Menu Operation
7-6 Setting object types
Specify the type of object to be measured. A number of object types can be registered (16 types (0 to 15)
on the IV-S31M, 32 types (0 to 31) on the IV-S32M and 64 types (0 to 63) on the IV-S33M).
Ë Setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "CHG-TYPE" item on the MAIN OPS MENU using the left and right keys and
then press the SET key.
- The object type setting list will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
Object type No. (00 to 63)
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE0 CAM1 POSITIONING
00 ×
01 ×
02 ×
03 ×
04 ×
05 ×
06 ×
07 ×
08 ×
09 ×
10 ×
11 ×
12 ×
13 ×
14 ×
15 ×
16 ×
17 ×
18 ×
19 ×
20 ×
21 ×
22 ×
23 ×
24 ×
25 ×
26 ×
27 ×
28 ×
29 ×
30 ×
31 ×
32 ×
33 ×
34 ×
35 ×
36 ×
37 ×
38 ×
39 ×
O: Registered
40 × 48 ×
41 × 49 ×
42 × 50 ×
43 × 51 ×
44 × 52 ×
45 × 53 ×
46 × 54 ×
47 × 55 ×
×: Not registered
56 ×
57 ×
58 ×
59 ×
60 ×
61 ×
62 ×
63 ×
When the IV-S33M is used
When the IV-S31M is used 00 to 15
When the IV-S32M is used 00 to 31
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
7
2. Move the cursor to the object number that you want to set up using the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
- The object type conditions can then be specified. ( : Registered, : Not registered)
When the IV-S33M is used, "Object type number 00 Yes/No" will be
displayed. Select "Yes" by pressing the left and right cursor keys.
E.g.) The registered conditions for object type 00
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE0 CAM1 POSITIONING
00 ○ 08 × 16 × 24 × 32 ×
01 × 09 × 17 × 25 × 33 ×
02 × 10 × 18 × 26 × 34 ×
40 ×
41 ×
42 ×
48 ×
49 ×
50 ×
56 ×
57 ×
58 ×
- The object type currently selected by the cursor will be the place where the measurement and
evaluation conditions are stored and the operation will be executed.
- After setting up the object type, if you press the SET key again, the settings will be ignored.
7-11
Simplified Menu Operation
7-7 Setting the shutter speed
- The shutter speed can be set independently for each object type.
- Since the shutter speed can be set continuously in the range of 1/30 to 1/10,000 of a second, very fine
adjustment is possible.
- If you want to measure moving objects and increase the image processing speed, set the shutter speed
to around 1/1000 or 1/2000 seconds. However, if you use a faster shutter speed than you need, very
bright lights will be necessary, and bright lighting is not economical.
- For details about the relationship between the brightness of objects (objects to be measured) and the
shutter speed, see section "5-1 [2] Illumination and shutter speed."
[Example]
- When the shutter speed is slow
(1/60 of a second)
The object is blurred across the screen.
7
- When the shutter speed is fast
(1/1000 of a second)
The object is frozen on the screen.
Ë Setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the SHUTTER item on the MAIN OPS MENU using the left and right keys, and
press the SET key.
- The shutter speed will be displayed.
2. Press the SET key.
3. Press the SET key again, and move the cursor to the digit you want, using the left and right keys.
1/ 00060
This cursor will move to the left and right.
4. Set the value using the up and down keys.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set each digit.
6. After setting all of the digits, press the SET key.
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE0 CAM1 POSITIONING
①SHUTTER SPEED
1/00060(1/30~1/10000)
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
7. To complete the setting of the shutter speed, press the ESC key.
7-12
Simplified Menu Operation
7-8 Setting the positioning conditions
In the positioning function, you can measure the absolute position of the workpiece using a gray search,
and also the degree of match between the measured image and the reference image.
It is also possible to evaluate whether the measurement result is within the OK range.
The gray scale search has two search modes: a 1-point search (measuring one point) and a 2-point
search (measuring two points).
(1) 1-point search
When a reference image is registered
When operating
The image detected
using the gray scale
search = Measured
image (model 0)
(X0, Y0)
Search area
(model 0)
[Measured result]
- Center coordinates of the measured image
X0 = 0 to 511.0 Y0 = 0 to 479.0
- Degree of match between the reference
image and the measured image
M0 = - 10000 to + 10000
Register a reference
image (model 0).
Search area (model 0)
(2) 2-point search
7
When a reference image is registered
When operating
Register a reference
image (model 0).
The image detected using the
gray scale search = Measured
image (model 0) (X0, Y0)
Search area
(model 0)
Register a
reference image
(model 1).
Search area (model 0)
Search area
(model 1)
Search area
(model 1)
The image detected using
the gray scale search
= Measured image
(model 1) (X1, Y1)
[Measured result]
- Range of center coordinates of the
measured image
Model 0 X0 = 0 to 511.0 Y0 = 0 to 479.0
Model 1 X1 = 0 to 511.0 Y1 = 0 to 479.0
- Range of degree of match between the
reference image and the measured image
Model 0 M0 = - 10000 to + 10000
Model 1 M1 = - 10000 to + 10000
* The degree of match refers to the level of sameness in the corresponding pixels when comparing the
reference image and the image of the measured object.
E.g.: + 09640 - 96.4 %
æ Gray scale search conditions
Pixel contraction:
Search the image in units of 4 pixels.
(This is equal to a pixel contraction setting of "2" in the CONTR. PIXEL
line on the standard menu.)
Detection precision: In units of pixels
(This equals the "STANDARD" detection precision setting in the DTECT
PRECISION line on the standard menu.)
Detection coordinate: The center of the rectangular window
7-13
Simplified Menu Operation
[1] Setting the measurement conditions
Set the reference image area and the search area using rectangular windows.
Ë Setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "POSI-COND" item on the menu bar of the MAIN OPS MENU, and press
the SET key.
- The screen will change to the measurement condition setting screen.
F.IMG C1 H
Press the TRG/BRT key on
the remote keypad, and the
brightness of the screen will
change between L and H.
Indicates that Camera 1 is
selected. (Camera 2: C 2)
Press the SEL key, and the
screen will switch between
the F.IMG (freeze mode)
and the T.IMG (through
mode).
1REG
7
NO 1P-SCH 2P-SCH
OPS-MENU
Note
- Before setting the measurement conditions, make sure to select camera type (when the IVS33M is used: page 7-31), set the object type (page 7-11), and select camera (page 7-5).
2. Press the SEL key.
- The image will be displayed. The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change
from F (freeze) to T (through).
When the image is so bright that the menu display is difficult to see, press the TRG/BRT key to
reduce the brightness of the image. The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will
change from "H" to "L."
3. To display the image of the object measured clearly, adjust the focus and iris opening of the
camera lens.
4. Move the cursor to the "1 REG" line, and press the SET key. Then, move the cursor to the "1PSCH" or "2P-SCH" item, and press the SET key.
- The image window and search window will be displayed in the center of the screen.
T.IMG C1 L
Image window
Search window
Object 1
1REG
NO 1P-SCH 2P-SCH
Object 2
OPS-MENU
7-14
Simplified Menu Operation
5. Press the SEL key to change the screen to the freeze mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T to F.
- To register reference images, you must make sure to display the freeze screen.
6. Press the ESC key to display all of the measurement condition items.
F.IMG C1 L
NO 1P-SCH 2P-SCH
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,281) CONTRAST SR
REG DISP
3SEARCH ARE(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
4REF IMG ARE(MDL1) MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,281) CONTRAST SR
REG DISP
5SEARCH ARE(MDL1) MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
1REG
2REF IMG ARE(MDL0)
CONTRAST SEARCH is only
displayed on the IV-S33M
Display when "2P-SHC" (2-point
search) is selected
OPS-MENU
- If the menu overlaps the object to be measured, so that further image condition setting is
difficult, press the ESC key. Only one item will be displayed at a time. (You can move the
cursor to each item and display each of them in order on the screen, using the up and down
keys. The following illustration shows only one item being displayed.)
7. Move the cursor to the "2 REF. IMG ARE (MDL 0)" item, and press the SET key.
8. Surround the object to be measured with the image window (solid line).
- Move the cursor to the "MOVE," "UP.L," or "LO. R," label and press the SET key.
MOVE
The whole rectangle is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
After the window position has been finalized, press the SET key.
F.IMG C1 L
Image window
Search window
Object 1
2REF IMG ARE(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(110,218) LO.R(174,277) REG DISP
OPS-MENU
7-15
7
Simplified Menu Operation
9. After the image window position has been set, move the cursor to the "REG." item using the left
and right keys, and press the SET key.
-The image will be registered in the memory and displayed in lower right corner of the screen.
- Move the cursor to the "DISP" item using the left and right keys, and press the SET key. Then,
the stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. After checking the
image, press the ESC key.
②REF IMG ARE(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(110,218) LO.R(174,277) CONTRAST SR
REG DISP
OPS-MENU
Cheak the stored
image. (DISP)
10. Press the ESC key and move the cursor to the "3 SEARCH ARE (MDL 0)" item. Then, press
the SET key.
11. Create a search window to be used as the search area (area to be used for a gray scale search).
- The procedure for creating the search area is the same as described for the image window in
step 8.
F.IMG C1 L
7
Image window
Search window
Object 1
3SEARCH ARE(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(043,162) LO.R(305,311)
OPS-MENU
12. Press the ESC key.
13. When a 2-point search is selected in the "1 REG" line, set items "4 REF. IMG ARE (MDL 1)"
and "5 SEARCH ARE (MDL 1)" by following the same procedures described in steps 7 to 12.
14. Press the ESC key to display all of the measurement condition items.
F.IMG C1 L
①REG
NO 1P-SCH 2P-SCH
②REF IMG ARE(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(110,218) LO.R(174,277) CONTRAST SR
REG DISP
③SEARCH ARE(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(043,162) LO.R(305,311)
④REF IMG ARE(MDL1) MOVE UP.L(301,288) LO.R(364,350) CONTRAST SR
REG DISP
⑤SEARCH ARE(MDL1) MOVE UP.L(241,262) LO.R(461,394)
These lines will only
be displayed when
a 2-point search is
selected.
運転
15. Move the cursor to the "OPS-MENU" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU. That completes the setting of the
measurement conditions.
7-16
Simplified Menu Operation
[2] Setting the position evaluation conditions
Set the X and Y coordinates for the image to be measured, and the OK range that will be used for the
degree of match.
Ë Setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "POSI-EVAL." item on the MAIN OPS MENU using the left and right keys,
and press the SET key.
- The position evaluation conditions will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
①X COORD.(MDL0)
②Y COORD.(MDL0)
③MATCH LVL(MDL0)
④X COORD.(MDL1)
⑤Y COORD.(MDL1)
⑥MATCH LVL(MDL1)
000.0~511.0
000.0~479.0
-10000~+10000
000.0~511.0
X0=
Y0=
M0=
X1=
000.0~479.0
-10000~+10000
Y1=
M1=
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
2. Move the cursor to the item you want to set or change using the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the minimum and maximum values using the left and right keys, and press the
SET key
4. Move the cursor to each digit using the left and right keys, and increase or decrease the value
using the up and down keys. Then, press the SET key.
5. Press the ESC key.
6. Press the ESC key again. That completes the setting of the position evaluation conditions.
7-17
7
Simplified Menu Operation
7-9 Setting the existence inspection conditions
The existence inspection function lets you determine whether or not a workpiece is present by measuring
the area after binary conversion.
Each object type can have up to 16 areas registered for it (8 each for Camera 1 and 8 more for Camera
2).
You can correct the measuring area’s X and Y specifications for conversion into binary, using the
correction values supplied by the gray search function.
In addition, you can evaluate whether the measurement result is within the OK range.
(1) When the XY correction function is set to "NO"
Measurement area
Workpiece (white area is measured)
A0
A1
A2
A3
[Measurement result]
- The area of each workpiece
A0 to A7 = 0 to 245760
A4
A5
A6
A7
7
(2) When the XY correction function is set to "YES"
When a reference image is registered
When operating
Register the
reference image
to be used for
making
corrections.
The position in which the
image is first registered
The position detected
by the gray scale search
(X0, Y0)
Search area
The position in which the
image is first registered
Search area
Specify the area
to measure.
Use a gray scale search to detect
the amount that the image is out of
place, and shift the measurement
area by that amount.
[Measured result]
- Center coordinates of the measured image that
needs to be corrected
X0 = 0 to 511.0 Y0 = 0 to 479.0
- Degree of match between the reference image and
the measured image M0 = - 10000 to + 10000
- The area of the workpiece (white area is measured)
A0 to A7 = 0 to 245760
7-18
Simplified Menu Operation
[1] Setting the measurement conditions
Define the binary measurement area using a rectangular window.
Ë Setting procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "EXIST-COND" item on the menu bar of the MAIN OPS MENU, and press
the SET key.
- The screen will change to the measurement condition setting screen.
F.IMG C1 H
Repeatedly pressing the
TRG/BRT key on the remote
keypad will toggle the brightness
of the screen between H and L.
Indicates Camera 1.
Repeatedly pressing the SEL key
will switch the screen back and
forth between the F.IMG (freeze
mode) and the T.IMG (through
mode).
1REGISTER NO.
0(0~7) NO YES
OPS-MENU
7
Note
- Before setting the measurement conditions, make sure to select camera type (when the IVS33M is used: page 7-31), set the object type (page 7-11) and select camera (page 7-5).
2. Press the SEL key.
- The image will be displayed. The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change
from F (freeze) to T (through).
When the image is so bright that the menu display is difficult to see, press the TRG/BRT key to
reduce the brightness of the image. The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will
change from "H" to "L."
3. To display the image of the object measured clearly, adjust the focus and iris opening of the
camera lens.
4. Move the cursor to the "1REGISTER NO." line, and press the SET key. Select a register No. (0
to 7) using the up and down keys, and move the cursor to "YES" using the left and right keys.
Then, press the SET key.
- The measurement window will be displayed in the center of the screen.
T.IMG C1 L
Object to be measured
Measurement window
1REGISTER NO.
0(0~7) NO YES
OPS-MENU
7-19
Simplified Menu Operation
5. Press the SEL key to change the screen to the freeze mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T to F.
- To set a threshold for a binary area, make sure the machine is displaying the freeze screen.
6. Press the ESC key to display all of the measurement condition items.
F.IMG C1 L
1REGISTER NO.
2MEAS AREA
3THRESHOLD
4INVERT B/W
0(0~7) NO YES
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)
NO YES
OPS-MENU
7
- If the menu overlaps the object to be measured, so that further image condition setting is
difficult, press the ESC key. Only one item "1" will be displayed at a time. (You can move the
cursor to each item and display each of them in order on the screen, using the up and down
keys. The following illustration shows only one item being displayed.)
7. Move the cursor to the "2 MEAS AREA" item, and press the SET key.
8. Place a measurement window around the object to be measured (solid line).
- Move the cursor to the "MOVE," "UP.L" or "LO.R," and press the set key.
MOVE
The whole rectangle is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (one pixel at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (one pixel at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, right or left keys (one pixel at a time).
-After the window position has been finalized, press the SET key.
Measurement window
Object to be measured
2MEAS AREA
MOVE UP.L(107,208) LO.R(198,295)
OPS-MENU
9. After the measurement window position is satisfactory, press the SET key.
10. Move the cursor to the "3 THRESHOLD" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
3THRESHOLD
U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)
OPS-MENU
11. Move the cursor to the "U.LM" or "L.LM" items and then press the SET key.
12. Move the cursor to each digit using the left and right keys, and increase or decrease the values
using the up and down keys. Then, press the SET key.
7-20
Simplified Menu Operation
Ë Threshold value setting
The IV-S30 treats the "areas darker than the lower limit value" or "brighter than the upper limit value"
as "black." It treats that the areas between the upper limit value and lower limit value as "white."
However, if the white-black reverse function is enabled, conversion to white/black will be reversed.
Normally, if you want to use only one threshold value for binary conversion, set the upper limit value to
"255." Then you only need to adjust the lower limit value to a threshold value that works for your
application.
(Threshold value)
255
White
Lower
limit A
Threshold value B
Binary conversion
(Upper limit = 255, lower limit = A)
Threshold value A
B
(Threshold value)
(Upper limit = 255, lower limit = A)
(Captured image)
(Threshold value)
255
Black
Upper
limit A
White
Lower
limit B
Black
0
Binary conversion
(upper limit = A,
lower limit = B)
Black
0
(Threshold value)
255
A
White
Lower
limit B
Black
0
7
An example of adjustment is shown below, using a white object on a black background. When the
dotted line in the window is converted to a binary image, if the lower limit is set higher, the black part in
the binary image will become larger. If the lower limit is set lower, the white part will become larger.
Increase and decrease the lower limit value, find the value at which the white part in the binary image
starts growing and the value at which the black part starts growing. Then set the lower limit at the value
halfway between these points. This will ensure reliable operation.
Black
Inspection image
The size of the white area changes
depending on the threshold value setting.
As the value increases,
the black part grows larger.
255
Lower limit threshold
White
0
Stable range *
White
As the value decreases,
the white part grows larger.
Horizontal coordinate
of the dotted line
Changing the lower limit threshold value
* If the stable range in the lower limit threshold
value is less than 20, (actual measurement)
measurement errors may occur.
13. Move the cursor to the "4 INVERT B/W" item
using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
4INVERT B/W
Measurement window
Object to be measured
NO YES
OPS-MENU
14. Move the cursor to "NO" or "YES" using the left
and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Since only the number of white pixels can be
measured, select "YES" if the object is black.
7-21
Inversion: NO
Inversion: YES
Simplified Menu Operation
15. Press the ESC key to display all of the measurement condition items.
F.IMG C1 L
1REGISTER NO.
2MEAS AREA
3THRESHOLD
4INVERT B/W
0(0~7) NO YES
MOVE UP.L(107,208) LO.R(198,295)
U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)
NO YES
OPS-MENU
16. Move the cursor to the "OPS-MENU" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU. That completes the setting of the
measurement conditions.
7
[2] Setting the evaluation conditions
Set the OK range for a measured area.
Ë Operating procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "EXIST-EVAL." item on the MAIN OPS MENU using the left and right
keys, and press the SET key.
- The evaluation conditions will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT1 EXISTENCE
①REG00
②REG01
③REG02
④REG03
⑤REG04
⑥REG05
⑦REG06
⑧REG07
X0~7
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
Y0~7
A00=
A01=
A02=
A03=
A04=
A05=
A06=
A07=
READY
CHG-TYPE
EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
2. Move the cursor to the item you want to set using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the minimum and maximum value entries using the left and right keys, and
press the SET key
4. Move the cursor to each digit using the left and right keys, and increase or decrease the values
using the up and down keys. Then, press the SET key.
5. Press the ESC key.
6. Press the ESC key again. That completes the setting of the evaluation conditions.
7-22
Simplified Menu Operation
[3] Setting the measurement conditions for correcting a position
When the "3 XY CORRECTION" item is set to "YES" on the [SIMPLIFIED MENU] screen, when the
position of the object to be measured is not correct, the correct area can still be measured by correcting
the position.
[SIMPLIFIED MENU]
1MEAS OBJ
POSITIONING EXISTENCE
2SELECT CAMERA CAM1 CAM1&2
3XY CORRECTION NO YES
OPS-MENU
Select "YES" to run the XY correction function.
Ë Operating procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "AUX-COND" item on the menu bar of the MAIN OPS MENU, and press
the SET key.
- The screen will change to the measurement condition setting screen.
F.IMG C1 H
Repeatedly pressing the
TRG/BRT key on the remote
keypad will toggle the brightness
of the screen between H and L.
Indicates Camera 1.
(Camera 2: C 2)
Repeatedly pressing the SEL key
will switch the screen back and
forth between the F.IMG (freeze
mode) and the T.IMG (through
mode).
1REG
NO YES
OPS-MENU
When "YES" is selected, a 1-point search is enabled.
The following procedures are the same as the 1-point search made for positioning. (See page 714 to 7-16.)
Notes
- Before setting the measurement conditions, make sure to select camera type (when the IVS33M is selected : page 7-31), set the object type (page 7-11) and select camera (page 7-5).
Select the same object type No. and Camera No. as were used for the existence inspection
condition settings.
7-23
7
Simplified Menu Operation
[4] Setting the evaluation conditions for correcting a position
Set the X and Y coordinates of the image used for making the correction, and the OK range that will be
used for determining the degree of match.
Ë Operating procedure
1. Move the cursor to the "AUX-EVAL" item on the MAIN OPS MENU using the left and right keys,
and press the SET key.
- The evaluation conditions will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE0 CAM1 POSITION CORRECTION
①X COORD. (MDL0) 000.0~511.0
②Y COORD. (MDL0) 000.0~479.0
③MATCH LVL (MDL0) -10000~+10000
7
X0~7
Y0~7
X0=
Y0=
M0=
READY
CHG-TYPE AUX-COND AUX-EVAL. EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
2. Move the cursor to the item you want to set using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the minimum and maximum value entries using the left and right keys, and
press the SET key
4. Move the cursor to each digit using the left and right keys, and increase or decrease the values
using the up and down keys.
5. Press the ESC key.
6. Press the ESC key again. That completes the setting of the evaluation conditions.
7-24
Simplified Menu Operation
7-10 Measurement triggering
[1] Trigger measurement
The IV-S30 has three methods for triggering measurements, as shown below.
1 Using the TRG/BRT key on the remote keypad
2 Triggered by an input terminal (IV-S31M : X0 toX4, IV-S32M : X0 to X5, IV-S33M : X0 to X6)
3 Triggered by a message on the general-purpose serial communication port
(1) Using the TRG/BRT key
1. Select the object type No. that you want to measure on the MAIN OPS MENU. -See page 7-11.
2. Press the TRG/BRT key to start the measurement function. The result will be displayed on the
monitor.
Ë A display example of positioning
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
OK
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
①X COORD.(MDL0)
②Y COORD.(MDL0)
③MATCH LVL(MDL0)
④X COORD.(MDL1)
⑤Y COORD.(MDL1)
⑥MATCH LVL(MDL1)
250.0~260.0 X0=253.0 OK
210.0~230.0 Y0=220.0 OK
-10000~+10000 M0=+09620
150.0~160.0 X1=156.0 OK
055.0~058.0 Y1=056.0 OK
-10000~+10000 M1=+09524
OK
OK
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
SEL-CAMERA
Ë A display example of an existence inspection
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
OK
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT 1 EXISTENCE
①REG00
②REG01
③REG02
④REG03
⑤REG04
⑥REG05
⑦REG06
⑧REG07
X0∼7
001600~001650
000000~245760
002600~027000
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
000000~245760
Y0∼7
A00=001619 OK
A01=
A02=026720 OK
A03=
A04=
A05=
A06=
A07=
READY
CHG-TYPE
EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
(2) Triggered by an input terminal
When the measurement start input (input terminal: X0) on the MAIN OPS MENU changes from OFF
to ON, the IV-S30 will start the measurement function. Specify the object type No. that will be
measured on input terminals, (IV-S31M : X1 to X4, IV-S32M : X1 to X5, IV-S33M : X1 to X6) -See
page 5-17 and 5-18.
7-25
7
Simplified Menu Operation
(3) Triggered by a message on the general-purpose serial communication port
In this method, the IV-S30 and a personal computer communicate with each other using commands
and responses.
- Specify the communication setting parameters by referring to the "2 COMM. SET" item on the
[SYSTEM COND] menu. -See page 7-27
- For details about the communication commands, see the IV-S30 User’s Manual (Function and
Operation).
[2] Result output
The IV-S30 has three methods for outputting results, as shown below.
1 Output on the output terminals (Y0, Y1)
2 Output over the general-purpose serial communication port
3 Output using a programmable controller computer link
(1) Output on the output terminals
The IV-S30 outputs the measured result to the output terminal.
Y0: Final output result
This will be ON when the results of all the items are OK. (This is equivalent to the auxiliary relay
C112.)
Y1: Measurement execution error
This will be ON when a measurement processing error occurs. (This is equivalent to the
auxiliary relay C118.)
For details about the auxiliary relays C112 and C118, see the IV-S30 User’s manual (Function and
Operation).
7
(2) Output over the general-purpose serial communication port
With this method, the IV-S30 and a personal computer communicate with each other using
commands and responses.
- Specify the serial port parameters in the items "1SERIAL OUTPUT" and "2COMM. SET" on the
[SYSTEM COND] menu. -See page 7-27.
- For details about the communication commands, see the IV-S30 User’s Manual (Function and
Operation).
(3) Output using a programmable controller computer link
With this method, the IV-S30 and a programmable controller communicate with each other using the
computer link.
- Specify the computer link setting parameters in the items "1SERIAL OUTPUT," "2COMM. SET"
and "3COMPUTER LINK" on the [SYSTEM COND] menu. -See pages 7-27 and 7-28.
- For details about the computer link, see the IV-S30 User’s Manual (Function and Operation).
7-11 Saving data
All the data entered on the condition setting menus, such as the measurement conditions and evaluation
conditions, are saved in the IV-S30 flash memory.
Ë Operating procedure
1. On the [MAIN OPS MENU], move the cursor to "SAVE" using the left and right keys, and press
the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the upper part of the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save the data?) (YES=[SET]/NO=[ESC])
2. Press the SET key.
- The IV-S30 will start saving the data and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the
screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMG ■■
SYSTEM I/O
■
OBJECT TYPE COND ■■■■■■■■■■■□□□□□
When the data has been saved in the IV-S30 flash memory, the display will change from
"SAVING" to "COMPLETE SAVE."
7-26
Simplified Menu Operation
7-12 Specify the system conditions
This section describes how to set the communication conditions and system time.
Move the cursor to the "SYS-CND" item on the menu bar of the MAIN OPS MENU, and press the SET key.
[SYSTEM COND]
①SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
②COMM.SET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
③COMPUTER LINK
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
④INITIALIZATION ALL-INIT INIT-RAM
⑤SIMPLE→SEL MENU EXEC
⑥SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC
⑦TIME 2000Y 08M 01D 10H 30M
⑧CAMERA TYPE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
F.IMG C1 H
OPS-MENU
Menu
1 SERIAL OUTPUT
2 COMM. SET
3 COMPUTER LINK
4 INITIALIZATION
Setting details
Reference pages
Use the serial output menu for setting the communication
parameters for the computer link or for the general-purpose
7-26
serial communication port.
When you select this item, the [SET COMM PARMS] menu
will be displayed on the lower screen. You can specify the
7-27
communication conditions.
When you select this item, the [COMPUTER LINK] menu will
be displayed on the lower screen. You can specify the
7-28
computer link communication conditions.
Initializes the flash memory and the RAM (Initialize all).
7-29
The screen will change to the menu selection screen (select
the simplified or standard menus).
Checks whether or not the IV-S30's hardware is operating
6 SELF DIAGNOSTICS normally.
Set the time when IV-S32M/S33M is used.
7 TIME
When the IV-S33M is used, select the camera type that is
8 CAMERA TYPE
connected (high-speed, standard, or EIA).
5 SIMPLE MENU
- STD
6-5
7-30
7-30
7-31
[1] Communication setting
When you want to use general-purpose serial communication or computer link communication, you must
set the communication conditions.
- Specify each item so that it will match the communication parameters of the target machine that you will
communicate with.
Move the cursor to the "2 COMM. SET" item on the
[SYSTEM COND] menu, and press the SET key.
[SYSTEM COND]
1SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
2COMM.SET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3COMPUTER LINK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
[SET COMM PARMS]
①COMM.STANDARD RS232C RS422(4-W 2-W)
②BAUDRATE(kbps)
2.4 4.8 9.6 19.2 38.4 57.6 115.2
③NO. OF DATA BITS 7 8BITS
④PARITY CHECK
EVEN ODD NO
⑤NO. OF STOP BITS 1 2BITS
⑥STATION NO.
00(0~7F)
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK
- For details about general-purpose serial port communications and computer link communications, see
the IV-S30 User’s Manual (Function and Operation).
7-27
7
Simplified Menu Operation
[2] Specify the computer link conditions
When you want to use computer link communications, you must specify the communication conditions.
On the [SYSTEM COND] menu, move the cursor to item "3 COMPUTER LINK" and press the SET key.
[SYSTEM COND]
1SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
2COMM.SET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3COMPUTER LINK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
[COMPUTER LINK]
1PC MANUFACTURER SHARP(COMM.PORT LINK-MDL) MITSUBISHI OMRON
2STATION NO. 01
3WRITE TOP ADRS 09000
4CONTROL PROC. FORM1 FORM4
5BLK WRT COMMAND WW QW
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK
Item
Station No.
7
Setting range
- Sharp: 00 to 37(8) *
- Mitsubishi: 00 to 31
- OMRON: 00 to 31
- Sharp: 09000 to 99776
Write address
(max. 512 bytes) - Mitsubishi: D0000 to D9999
- OMRON: DM0000 to DM9999
Only shown when "MITSUBISHI"
is selected in 1 on the
[COMPUTER LINK] menu.
* In this manual, octal notation is indicated by
adding(8) after a number.
Menu
Setting details
Select either FORM 1 or 4 for the control procedure.
4 CONTROL
PROC.
FORM 1
No line terminator
FORM 4
With line terminators: CR + LF
- In version 2.01, only FORM 1 was available.
Select either WW or QW for the block write command.
5 BLK WRT
COMMAND
WW
Data writing address range: D0000 to D1023
QW
Data writing address range: D000000 to D008191
- In version 2.01, only WW was available.
- If "SHARP" or "OMRON" is selected, items 4 and 5 will not be displayed.
- For details about computer link communications, see the IV-S30 User’s Manual (Function and
Operation).
7-28
Simplified Menu Operation
[3] Initialization
If you initialize the IV-S30, the specified measurement conditions, evaluation conditions, operation
conditions, and system conditions will be reset to their initial condition.
The system time data will not be initialized.
The IV-S30 has two initialization modes: "Initialize all" and "Initialize RAM."
Initialization
Details
Initializes the data in both the flash memory and RAM. Returns the settings
ALL-INIT
to the factory default settings (the same as when the machine was
(Initialize all) delivered). When the power is turned ON again after this initialization
method is selected, the data will be initialized.
Initializes the RAM data.
INIT-RAM
When power is turned ON after this initialization method is selected, the
(Initialize RAM)
data that you had stored in flash memory will be retrieved and displayed.
Ë Operating procedure
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to the "SYS-CND" item, and press the SET key.
[SYSTEM COND]
1SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
2COMM.SET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
3COMPUTER LINK (TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
4INITIALIZATION ALL-INIT INIT-RAM
5SIMPLE MENU→STD EXEC
7
1. Move the cursor to the "4 INITIALIZATION" item using the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
2. Select either "ALL-INIT" or "INIT-RAM" using the left and right keys.
3. Press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed.
INITIALIZE DATA? (Do you want to initialize the data?) (YES=[SET]/NO=[ESC])
4. Press the SET key again. (Press the ESC key to abort the initialization.)
- Initialization will start, and the progress of the initialization will be displayed on the bottom
of the screen.
INITIALIZING
REFERENCE IMG ■■
SYSTEM I/O
■
OBJECT TYPE COND ■■■■■■■■■■■□□□□□
When initialization is complete, the message "INITIALIZING" will change to "COMPLETE INIT."
7-29
Simplified Menu Operation
[4] Self-diagnosis
The IV-S31M/S32M/S33M controller can check all of its own hardware, to ensure that it is operating
normally.
(1) Diagnostic items and methods
Item
Object
VRAM
VRAM (memory)
SDRAM
SDRAM (memory)
Timer
Object type conditions
Flash memory
Reference image
Flash memory
Boot program
Flash memory
System program
Flash memory
Check method
Read after write
Read after write
Checksum
Checksum
Checksum
Checksum
Error display
NG
NG
NG
NG + error object No.
NG
NG
NG
(2) Operating procedure
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to the "SYS-CND" item, and press the SET key.
[SYSTEM COND]
①SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
②COMM.SET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
③COMPUTER LINK
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
④INITIALIZATION ALL-INIT INIT-RAM
⑤SIMPLE→SEL MENU EXEC
⑥SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC
⑦TIME 2000Y 08M 01D 18H 56M
⑧CAMERA TYPE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
7
Order of diagnosis
OPS-MENU
After the diagnosis is complete,
the message will change to
"COMPLETE DIAGNOSIS."
DIAGNOSING
VRAM
SDRAM
TIME
OK
OK
OK
TYPE COND
REFERENCE IMG
BOOT-PROG
SYSTEM-PROG
OK
OK
OK
OK
1. Move the cursor to item "6 SELF
DIAGNOSTICS" with the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
- The [SELF DIAGNOSITICS] menu will be
displayed, and each item will be checked. If
the result of each diagnosis is normal, OK
will be displayed. If the result is abnormal,
NG will be displayed.
If any abnormality occurs, consult our service
center.
[5] Setting the system time (IV-S32M/S33M)
Set the time displayed on the monitor for the IV-S32M/S33M.
On the MAIN OPS MENU, move the cursor to the "SYS-CND" item, and press the SET key.
[SYSTEM COND]
①SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
②COMM.SET
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
③COMPUTER LINK
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
④INITIALIZATION ALL-INIT INIT-RAM
⑤SIMPLE→SEL MENU EXEC
⑥SELF DIAGNOSTICS EXEC
⑦TIME 2000Y 08M 01D 18H 56M
⑧CAMERA TYPE
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
OPS-MENU
7-30
1. Move the cursor to the "7TIME" item using the
up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "SEC.," "MIN.," "D," "M," and
"Y" using the left and right keys, and enter the
correct value at each location using the up and
down keys.
Y = 1999 to 2098
M = 01 to 12
D = 01 to 31
H = 00 to 23
MIN. = 00 to 59
3. Press the SET key. The time will be set and the
system will start using the new time.
Simplified Menu Operation
[6] Camera setting (IV-S33M)
Select the camera type (standard, high-speed, or EIA) that is connected to the controller.
Camera selection
Standard
High-speed
EIA
Details
Select when SHARP's standard camera (IV-S30C1/S30C2) is connected
to the IV-S33M.
Select when SHARP's high-speed camera (IV-S30C3/S30C4) is connected
to the IV-S33M.
Select when a commercially available EIA camera (Sony XC-75 or similar)
is connected to the IV-S33M.
In this case, you also have to set the camera synchronization mode
(External or Internal).
On the MAIN OPS MENU screen, move the cursor to the "SYS-CND" item and press the SET key.
- On the [SYSTEM COND] menu, move the cursor to , "8CAMERA TYPE", and press the SET key.
» To select the "STANDERD" camera settings
[SYSTM COND]
①SERIAL OUTPUT NO PC-LINK SERIAL
⑧CAMERA TYPE
OPS-MENU
[CAMERA SET]
①SELECT CAMERA
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
STANDARD HIGH SPEED EIA
7
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK
» To select the "HIGH SPEED" camera settings
①SELECT CAMERA
STANDARD HIGH SPEED EIA
②CAPTURE IMG MODE FULL HALF FULL+HALF
» To select the "EIA" camera settings
①SELECT CAMERA
STANDARD HIGH SPEED EIA
②SYNCHRONIZE CAM EXTERNAL SYNCH INTERNAL SYNCH
③CAPURE IMG MODE FULL HALF
- When "HIGH SPEED" or "EIA" is selected, choose the image capture mode.
Image capture mode
Details
Full
Scan all the lines in the image
Half
Scan only the odd lines in the image
In the partial image mode, the measurement target lines are
Full + half *
scanned in full mode and the others are scanned in half mode
* The "Full + half" mode can only be selected when the camera type is set to "HIGH SPEED"
For more image capture time and processing details, see the next page.
- When "EIA" is selected, you must select a camera synchronization mode (External or Internal).
For details about camera synchronization, see page 6-8.
7-31
Simplified Menu Operation
Ë Comparative examples of image capture times
1 When a standard camera is used and the partial image size is 50 % (240 lines of the 480 lines).
Whole image
(full mode)
Partial image
(full mode)
- For details about whole and partial images
- See page 7-7.
Image
capture time
33.3 ms
16.7 ms
2 When a high-speed camera is used and the partial image size is 50% (240 lines of the 480 lines).
Whole image
(full mode)
Partial image
(full + half mode)
Whole image
(half mode)
Partial image
(full mode)
8.3 ms
8.3 ms
Partial image
(half mode)
7
Image
capture
time
16.7 ms
12.5 ms
4.2 ms
Ë Processing details of the image capture mode
Image capture mode
Half
- Correct the specified area and
transfer
- Transfer the
- Transfer only the
Image capture
- The even line image will be
specified lines
full mode area
supplemented by the odd line
image.
- Put all of the
- Put all of the
Process for setting up
- Put all of the captured line
captured line area captured line area
the screen
area in the half mode.
in the full mode
in the full mode
Process from run to
setting up the screen
Full
---
Full + half
- Delete the half
mode area
7-32
---
Specifications
Chapter 8: Specifications
8-1 Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M)
Specifications
IV-S31M
IV-S32M
IV-S33M
Image sampling system
256 level gray scale, binary conversion, edge detection
One screen for displaying captured images. One monochrome screen for
Image memory
displaying camera information and messages
No.of assignable object type
16 object types
32 object types
64 object types
Maximum number of reference
images stored / number of
300 / 3 screens
600 / 8 screens
whole screens stored
Standard camera
33.3 ms *2
(IV-S30C1/C2)
High-speed camera
16.7 ms [full mode]
--(IV-S30C3/C4)
8.3 ms [half mode] *2
Commercially available
33.3 ms [full mode]
--EIA camera
16.7 ms [half mode]
Gray search time *1
18 ms
12 ms
9 ms
Gray search, edge detection
Pixel, sub-pixel
precision
Shading correction
Dividing, subtracting, and filtering
Subtracting, absolute value of difference (between camera 1 and reference
Comparative calculation
image, between camera 2 and reference image, between camera 1 and
between images
camera 2)
Magnification by "n" processing, γ (+/-) correction, histogram widening, midGray level changes
range emphasis
Smoothing (center/average), edge emphasis, edge extraction, horizontal
Space filter
edge, vertical edge
F
ixed and threshold value corrections (variation difference/variation rate)
Binary threshold value
Expansion - contraction, contraction - expansion, area filter
Binary noise elimination
Specified window( rectangle, circle, oval), any binary image mask
Binary image mask
Positional correction method X/Y correction, rotation correction
XY coordinate, deviation amount in X and Y axes, degree of match (1-point
search, 2-point search, 1-point edge, 2-point edge, 1-point search and 1Positional deviation
point edge)
measurement
Angle: ±15 , ±30 , ±45 , 360 (1-point search, 1-point search + 1-point edge)
[Maximum 8 windows x 2 models]
Degree of match
Degree of match, XY coordinate, density (1-point search, 2-point search)
inspection
[Maximum 16 windows x 2 models]
Area measurement by
Area [Maximum 16 windows]
binary conversion
Object counting by
Quantity (maximum 3,000 items per window), total area
binary conversion
[Maximum 4 windows]
Quantity (maximum 128 per window), total area, area of each object
Object identification by
identified, gravity center, main axis angle, fillet diameter, peripheral length,
binary conversion
center point
[Maximum 4 windows]
Number in binary image (maximum 256 points), average density (Maximum
Point measurement
128 points)
Number of leads, distance between leads (max., min.), lead width (max.,
Lead inspection
min.), lead length (max., min.)
[Maximum 16 windows]
Number of labels, total area, area of each label, XY pitch (max., min.) XY
BGA/CSP inspection
fillet diameter (max., min.), [Maximum 4 windows ] (IV-S32M/S33M only)
Multiple position
Number of objects (max. 128), degree of match, XY coordinate (1-point
inspection
search, 1-point edge)
[Maximum 4 windows]
Multiple degree of match Number of objects (max. 128), degree of match, XY coordinate (1-point
inspection
search)
[Maximum 4 windows]
Measurement program
(standard menu)
Image pre-processing
Image scan time
Item
*1. The gray search time is true when the search area is 256 x 256 pixels, the model size is 64 x 64
pixels, and the contraction function is set to 3.
*2. Variable, with partial-image capturing.
8-1
8
Specifications
Specifications
IV-S31M
IV-S32M
IV-S33M
Maximum 6 per object type (measurement 0 - camera 1, measurement 0 Number of measurement
camera 2, measurements 1 to 4)
programs
Note: Measurement 0 is only used for positional deviation measurement.
XY coordinate, degree of match (1-point search, 2-point search )
SimpliPositioning
[1 window]
fied
menu Existence inspection
Area [Maximum 8 windows]
Rectangle, circle, oval (when using area measurement by binary
Window shape
conversion, object counting by binary conversion, object identification by
binary measurement)
Measure distance (between two points, X coordinate, Y coordinate),
Distance and angle
measure angle (3 points, 2 points against horizontal line, 2 points against
measurement
vertical line), auxiliary point (center, circle center, gravity center, line over 2
points, crossing point of two straight lines)
Four basic operations (+, -, X, /), root, absolute value, TAN, ATAN,
Arithmetic operation
maximum, minimum, average , total.
NG image memory function
-- Maximum 128 images (8 whole screens)
Year, month, day, hour, minute
Calendar timer
--Display measuring time, light level monitor function, crosshair cursor
display, change display language between Japanese and English, Run
Other functions
screen lock function, setting menu display "yes/no", change image display
(through/freeze), change image brightness (bright/dark)
Parallel input: 8 points (X0 to X7)
Input relays
Parallel output: 8 points (Y0 to Y7)
Output relays
General-purpose serial interface, computer link: 16 points (Y0 to Y15)
128 points (C0 to C127), special area 18 points (C110 to C127)
Auxiliary relays
8 points (TM0 to TM7), timer setting range: 0.01 to 9.99 seconds
Timers
(countdown timer)
8 points (CN0 to CN7), counter setting range: 000 to 999 (counts down)
Counters
Input: 8 points, 12/24 VDC, approx. 7 mA (24VDC)
Parallel interface
Output: 9 points, 12/24 VDC, max. 100 mA, FET output
General-purpose serial
RS232C/RS422 (2.4 to 115.2 kbps)
interface
Built-in compatibility with certain SHARP, OMON, and Mitsubishi models
Computer link
USB
USB device node, 12 Mbps
1 channel, EIA 525 lines, 2:1 interlace
Image output
Number of cameras
Maximum of 2
Using the IV-S30RK1 remote keypad and/or the IV-S30SP parameter
Make settings
setting support software
MeasuInternal trigger
CCD trigger (using the CCD camera)
rement
Trigger input (parallel I/F), general-purpose serial I/F, keypad trigger (for
start
External trigger
manual measuring)
input
Interrupt processing
1 point: External trigger (X0)
input
7 points: Object type
7 points: Object type
7 points: Object type
change (X1 to X4),
change (X1 to X5),
change (X1 to X6),
Inputs
external input (X5 to X7) external input (X6 and external input (X7)
X7)
Common for input 1 point: + or - common
External interface
Terminal block
8
Micro PC section
Item
Output
9 points: 1 READY , 8 user settable logical outputs (Y0 to Y7)
Common for output
1 point: + or - common
Power supply
Power supply voltage / power
consumption
2 points: +24 VDC, 0 V
24 VDC (±10%), 7 W
8-2
24 VDC (±10%), 8 W
Specifications
Item
Specifications
IV-S32M
IV-S31M
IV-S33M
Storage ambient temperature -20 to 70oC
Operation ambient temperature 0 to 45oC
Operation ambient humidity
Operation atmosphere
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Noise immunity
Outside dimensions
Weight
Accessories
35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases or dust
JIS C 0911 or equivalent
- Amplitude 0.15 mm (10 to 57 Hz), 9.8 m/s2 (57 to 150 Hz)
Number of sweeps: 10 (1 octave/min.), 3 directions (X, Y, Z)
JIS C 0912 or equivalent : 147 m/s2 (three times each in X, Y, and Z directions)
1000 Vp-p 1µs width impulse (by noise simulator) when applied to the primary side
(100 VAC) of an external DC power supply
130 (W) × 100 (D) × 42 (H) mm (except protruding portions)
510 g
- 2 main housing angle bracket
- 1 monitor cable
- 1 conversion connector
- 1 D-sub connector
(9-pin, D-sub, male, M2.6 lock screw: for communication connector of the controller)
- 4 securing screws (M3 x 6: for fixing the angle bracket)
- 1 instruction manual
8
8-3
Specifications
8-2 Camera specifications
[1] Camera (IV-S30C1/C2/C3/C4)
Specifications
Micro,
Hight speed,
IV-S30C2
IV-S30C3
custom φ17 mm
Lens mount method C mount
C mount
mount
Method
Interline transmission method, monochrome CCD
Item
Optical
system
Standard,
IV-S30C1
Reading system
Picture
taking
element
Shutter
Reading
Size
Micro and hight
speed, IV-S30C4
custom φ17 mm
mount
Full pixel type, partial image scanning is available
16.7 ms [full mode], 8.3m [half
33.3 ms *
mode]*
1/3 inch
No. of effective pixels 512 (horizontal) × 480 (vertical)
Pixel shape
Square
Shutter speed (s) Settable between 1/30 and 1/10,000 for each object type
Method
Random shutter
Conncter
Round, 12-pin male connector
- Using custom camera cables (IV- Using custom camera cables (IVConnection to controller
S30KC3: 3 m, IV-S30KC5: 5 m, IVS30KC3: 3 m, IV-S30KC5: 5 m)
S30KC7: 7 m)
Operation ambient temperature 0 to 45oC
Operation ambient humidity
Operation atmosphere
8
Outside
dimensions (mm)
Camera body
Head
Head cable
Weight
Accessories
35 to 85% RH (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases or dust
30 (W) × 32 (H) 30 (W) × 32 (H)
× 40 (D)
× 50 (D)
φ17× 35.6 mm
---
30 (W) × 32 (H)
× 40 (D)
---
--50 g (not
including the
lens)
--50 g (not
including the
lens)
1m
125 g(The head
weighs
approximately
12 g)
- 1 camera angle - 1 camera angle
bracket
bracket
- 2 securing
- 1 camera head
screws
bracket
- 3 securing
screws
- 1 Instruction
Manual
1m
140 g(The head
weighs
approximately
13 g)
- 1 camera angle - 1 camera angle
bracket
bracket
- 2 securing
- 1 camera head
screws
bracket
- 1 Instruction
- 3 securing
Manual
screws
- 1 Instruction
Manual
* Variable with partial-image capturing
8-4
30 (W) × 32 (H)
× 44.7 (D)
φ17× 35.6 mm
Specifications
[2] Camera converter (IV-S30EA1)
Item
Function
TV system
Image input
Number of scan lines
Scanning method
EIA equivalent camera
1 Vp-p (75 ohm load)
525
2:1 interlace
Internal/external
Camera to be
Note: External synchronization may not be available with
connected
Synchronization system
some EIA cameras (The converter is compatible with
Sony's S-DNPISHA and the special shutter made by
Tokyo Electronic Industries)
Scanning frequency Horizontal: 15. 734 KHz, Vertical: 59.94 Hz
Pulse width
HD: 6.4 ±0.3 µs, VD: 150 to 800 µs
Power supply
12V ± 10%(300mA / one set or less)
Number of cameras that can be
2
connected
Camera connectors
Round, 12-pin female connectors
Main housing connector
D-sub, 25-pin female connectors
Power supply voltage
24 V, 0.5 A (12 W)
Ambient operating temperature
0 to 45° C
Operating humidity
35 to 85% RH (non condensing)
Outside dimensions
70 (W) x 100 (H) x 25 (D) mm
Connection to the controller
Using the supplied main housing cable (250 mm)
Camera converter: approximately 255 g, main interface
Weight
cable: approximately 150 g
1 main interface cable
Cable length: 250 mm, Connector: D-sub 25 pin male,
Hirose round, 12-pin male
Accessories
2 main housing mounting brackets
4 securing screws
1 instruction manual
8-5
8
Specifications
[3] Camera lens (IV-S20L16)
Item
Focal distance
Specifications
16 mm
Maximum f-stop
1.6
Aperture range
1.6 to 16, Close
Focal range
Filter installation dia.
Mount system
Compatible cameras
50 mm to ∞
M 25.5, P = 0.75, U1
C mount
IV-S30C1/C3, IV-S20C1 (camera for the IV-S20)
[4] Camera cable: IV-S30KC3/S30KC5/S30KC7
Item
Specifications
Overall length
3m (IV-S30KC3), 5m (IV-S30KC5), 7m (IV-S30KC7)
Cable sheath
Polyvinyl chrolide
Video connectors
Minimum bending radius
Main housing: Round, 12-pin male connector
Camera: Round, 12-pin male connector
75 mm
8
8-6
Specifications
8-3 Support tools
[1] Monochrome monitor IV-09MT
Item
Speicfications
Power input voltage
90 to 110VAC, 50/60Hz
Input capacity
25 VA
Signal voltage
1.0Vp-p/75 ohms
Screen display resolution
900 scanning lines (center), 600 scanning lines (edges)
Scan method
EIA 525 lines (2:1 interlaced)
Scan frequency
Horizontal : 15.75 kHz, vertical : 48 to 62 Hz
Image size
8% under scan
Linearity
Horizontal : 10% or less, vertical : max. 10%
Image input connector
BNC
Image input impedance
75 ohms/ High-Z
Video output connector
Front
BNC
Adjustments
Focus, vertical width, horizontal linearity, sub-brightness (only used
by our service staff)
Back
Brightness, contrast, vertical position, horizontal position
Storage ambient temperature
-20 to 60oC
Operation ambient
temperature
0 to 45oC
Operation ambient humidity
35 to 85 %RH (non-considering)
Atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Vibration resistance
JIS C 0911 or equivalent
- Amplitude 0.15mm, (10 to 57Hz), 9.8m/s2 (57 to 150Hz),
No. of sweeps : 10 (1 octave/min.) 3 directions (X, Y, Z)
Shock resistance
JIS C 0912 or equivalent, 147m/s2 (3 times each in X,Y, and Z
directions)
Weight
Approx. 6 kg
Dimensions (mm)
220 (W) × 238 (H) × 257 (D) (not including prorusion)
Dielectric resistance
1000 VAC, 1 minute (between AC plug and shassis)
Insulation resistance
DC 500VDC, 10M ohms or more (between AC plug and chassis)
Accessories
One instruction manual
8
External dimension drawings
252
(Unit : mm)
252
238
11
238
227
220
8-7
Specifications
[2] LED lighting equipment IV-60LD specifications
Item
Specifications
36 pcs of 5mm diameter
- High brightness LEDs
LEDs used
Approx. 50mm × 50mm (workpiece distance at 150mm)
Standard lighting range
Input voltage
24 VDC ±10% , 2P terminal
Current consumption
Approx. 2W
Lighting level adjustment
Semi-fixed volume
0 to 45oC
Operation ambient temperature
-10 to 60oC
Storage ambient temperature
Operation ambient humidity
35 to 90%RH (non-condensing)
Operation atmosphere
No corrosive gases or dust
JIS C 0911 or equivalent
- Amplitude 2mm (10 to 61 Hz), 147m/s2 (61 to 150Hz),
No. of sweeps : 10 (1 octave/min.), 3 directions (X,Y,Z)
Vibration resistance
JIS C 0912 or equivalent, 147m/s2 (each 3 times in X, Y, and
Z directions)
Shock resistance
76.9 × 73.6 × 25.0 (except camara angle bracket)
Outside dimensions (mm)
Approx. 230g (IV-60LD body : Approx. 140g + Camera angle
bracket : Approx. 90g)
Accessories
One camera angle bracket, 6 installation screws (M3 × 6mm),
one instruction manual
Ë External dimension drawings
Shown below are an IV-S30C1 camera with an IV-S20L16 camera lens installed.
73.6
(Unit : mm)
17
* (2 places)
The dimensions will vary according to
the installation direction of the camera.
32.5
19.8
77.3
Camera center
32
32
19.8
Camera center
17
32.5
25
3
25
90
62
*
62
34
44.8
Camera center
73.6
8-8
104 ( or 98.5, 93 )
44.8
34 *
77.3
3
8
Weight
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Positioning measurement)
Chapter 9: Operation Examples
This chapter explains how to operate each measurement program. Be sure you understand the general
operation procedures described in this chapter.
9-1
Simplified menu
9-2
Standard menu
Item
Page
[1] Positioning measurement
9-2 to 9-5
[2] Existence inspection
9-6 to 9-9
[1] Area measurement by binary conversion 9-10 to 9-14
[2] Positional deviation mesurement
9-15 to 9-21
Ë Preparation for operation
Before turning ON the power, connect the IV-S30 controller, the camera, monitor, remote key pad
and power supply (24 VDC). Connect the camera to the camera 1 connector (CAMERA 1) on the
IV-S30 controller.
See Chapter 5 "Installation Conditions and Method" for connecting procedures.
Camera 1
Monitor
Remote key pad
VIDEO
CAMERA1
USB
RS232C/RS422
CAMERA2
REMOTE
Controller
POWER
OUTPUT
Y0
Y1
X0
Y2
X1
Y3
X2
Y4
X3
Y5
X4
Y6
X5
Y7
X6
READY COM
X7
0V
COM +24V
INPUT
IV-S3*M
Power supply (24 VDC)
9
Notes
- Sections 9-1 and 9-2 give the instructions for making each measurement, starting from the
initial conditions of the machine. To follow the instructions, first initialize all the machine's
conditions and then start the procedures. For details about performing a complete
initialization, see the respective pages, described below.
- Simplified menus - Page 7-29
- Standard menus - "Total initialization" in the IV-S30 user’s manual (Function and
Operation)
9-1
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Positioning measurement)
9-1 Simplified menu
[1] Positioning measurement
The following sections cover an example of how to measure the positioning of the object shown below.
Object to be measured
(1) Power ON
When power is first turned ON after the machine is deliverd, the [SELECT MENU] screen will
appear.
- When the MAIN OPS MENU used by the simplified menus (positioning) is displayed, the
operations covered in steps (2) and (3) are not needed.
- If the MAIN OPS MENU used by the standard menus is displayed, please change to the simplified
menus screen. - See page 6-5.
(2) Select menu
[SELECT MENU]
1STANDARD MENU (STD RUN-MENU)
2SIMPLIFIED MENU (SEL EASY MENU)
1
1.Move the cursor to the "2SIMLIFIED MENU" item with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The [SIMLIFIED MENU] menu screen will appear.
(3) Placing the object to be measured (positioning)
[SIMPLIFIED MENU]
1
1MEAS OBJ
2SELECT CAMERA
2
POSITIONING EXISTENCE
CAM1 CAM1&2
OPS-MENU
9
3
1. Move the cursor to the "1MEAS OBJ" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
2. Move the cursor to "POSITIONING" using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the "OPS-MENU" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- The MAIN OPS MENU for setting up positioning measurements will be displayed.
(4) Registration of an object type number (IV-S33M is registered in 00 in this example)
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE0 CAM1 POSITIONING
1
00 ×
01 ×
02 ×
03 ×
04 ×
05 ×
06 ×
07 ×
08 ×
09 ×
10 ×
11 ×
12 ×
13 ×
14 ×
15 ×
16 ×
17 ×
18 ×
19 ×
20 ×
21 ×
22 ×
23 ×
24 ×
25 ×
26 ×
27 ×
28 ×
29 ×
30 ×
31 ×
32 ×
33 ×
34 ×
35 ×
36 ×
37 ×
38 ×
39 ×
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
48 ×
49 ×
50 ×
51 ×
52 ×
53 ×
54 ×
55 ×
56 ×
57 ×
58 ×
59 ×
60 ×
61 ×
62 ×
63 ×
When the IV-S33M is used
When the IV-S31M is used 00 to 15
When the IV-S32M is used 00 to 31
2
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
1. Move the cursor to the X next to object type number 00 using the up and down keys. Then
press the SET key.
- The X will change to a circle meaning that object type 00 has been registered.
2. Move the cursor to the "POSI-COND" item using the left and right keys, and press the SET
key.
- The measurement condition setting screen will be displayed.
To the next page
9-2
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Positioning measurement)
Continued from the previous page
(5) Image adjustment (1P-SCH is selected in this example)
1
F.IMG C1 L
Press the TRG/BRT key and the
brightness of the screen will change
between L and H.
5
Indicates that Camera 1 is selected.
1REG
3
NO 1P-SCH 2P-SCH
4
OPS-MENU
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- When the image is so bright that the menu display is difficult to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce the
brightness of the image. The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from "H" to "L."
2. To display the image of the object measured clearly, adjust the focus and iris opening of the camera lens
(page 4-1).
3. Move the cursor to the "1REG" line, and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to the "1P-SCH" item with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The reference image area and search area will be displayed in the center of the screen.
5. Press the SEL key to change the screen to the freeze mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T to F.
- To register reference images, you must make sure to display the freeze screen.
6. Press the ESC key to display all of the measurement condition items.
(6) Setting the measurement conditions
1
3
F.IMG C1 L
1REG
NO 1P-SCH 2P-SCH
2REF IMG ARE(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,281) CONTRAST SR
REG DISP
3SEARCH ARE(MDL0) MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
- If the menu overlaps the object to be
measured, so that further image condition
setting is difficult, press the ESC key. Only
item 1 will be displayed at a time.
Reference image area
2
Search area
5
OPS-MENU
1. Move the cursor to the "2REF. IMG ARE (MDL 0)" item with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Surround the object to be measured with the reference image area (solid line).
- Move the cursor to the "MOVE," "UP.L," or "LO. R," label and press the SET key.
MOVE
The whole rectangle is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
After the position has been finalized, press the SET key.
Reference image area
- After the reference image area position has been set,
move the cursor to the "REG." item using the left and right
keys, and press the SET key.
Detected coordinate
- The stored image will be displayed in the lower right
(+ part)
corner of the screen. After storing the image, press the
ESC key.
3. Press the ESC key and move the cursor to the "3 SEARCH ARE (MDL 0)" item. Then, press the SET key.
4. Create a search area (dotted line).
- The search area described above is the range for detecting the image registered in step 2, using the gray
scale search function (see the Glossary).
- The procedure for creating the search area is the same as described for the reference image area in step 2.
Search area
- After specifying the search area position, press the ESC key.
5. Move the cursor to the "OPS-MENU" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
To the next page
9-3
9
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Positioning measurement)
Continued from the previous page
(7) Setting the position evaluation conditions
1. Move the cursor to the "POSI-EVAL." item on the MAIN OPS MENU using the left and right keys,
and press the SET key.
- The items 1 to 3 will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSITIONING
2
①X COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~511.0
②Y COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~479.0
③MATCH LVL(MDL0) -10000~+10000
X0=
Y0=
M0=
3
1
X0~7
5
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
2. Move the cursor to "3MATCH LVL (MDL0)" with the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the minimum value position with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the digit to change with the left and right keys, and then set the value to +09000 with the up
and down keys.
(Criteria for a successful match: 90.00% to 100.00%)
3MATCH LVL(MDL0) -10000~+10000
9
- After defining the minimum value, press the SET key, and then the ESC key.
4. Press the TRG/BRT key.
- The measurement (evaluation) results for items 1 to 3 and the image will be displayed.
1X COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~511.0 X0=253.0
OK
2Y COORD.(MDL0) 000.0~479.0 Y0=220.0
OK
3MATCH LVL(MDL0) +09000~+10000 M0=+09620 OK
Evaluation result
Measurment result
5. Press "ESC," and move the cursor to the "CHG-TYPE" item using the left and right keys, to confirm
that "Object type number 00" has been selected.
6. Move the cursor away from the "CHG-TYPE" item using the left and right keys.
To the next page
9-4
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Positioning measurement)
Continued from the previous page
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the result of measuring (evaluating) and image (search) area will be displayed.
(8) Mesuring the position
[Display of the measured
result]
Final evaluation result (*1)
(TYPE00)
Measuring time
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASURE0 CAM1 POSITIONING
Detection coordinates of the
reference image
X0=253.0
Y0=220.0
M0=+09620
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
OK
OK
OK
OK
Degree of match of the
reference image (*2)
*3
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE POSI-COND POSI-EVAL.
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
*1 The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the
items have been evaluated acceptable.
If there is a single unacceptable item, "NG" will be displayed.
*2 "M0 +09620" means that the degree of match (percentage of pixels that match) between pixels in the
stored image and the measured image is 96.20%.
[The acceptance and rejection criteria based on the degree of match]
In order to evaluate acceptability based on the degree of match, first an image of a good specimen is
stored for reference. Then, an image of defective specimen is compared for degree of match. Finally an
image of another good specimen is compared. These comparisons establish the degree of match to be
used for setting the limits used for working comparisons.
For example, the degree of match for a non-defective object is 90% or more and that for a defective
object is 70% or less, then the threshold value for degree of match can be set to approx. 85%. This
allows the evaluation acceptability to be made.
*3 Although the specified data is temporarily stored in RAM memory, it is not stored in the flash memory.
So, you must save the data manually using the save operation. If you do not save the data in the flash
memory, it will be deleted when the IV-S30 controller is turned OFF. - See page 7-26.
9-5
9
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Existence inspection)
[2] Existence inspection
The following sections describe an example of the existence inspection, using the object shown below
as the target.
Object to be measured
(1) Power ON
When power is first turned ON after the machine is deliverd, the [SELECT MENU] screen will
appear.
- When the MAIN OPS MENU used by the simplified menus (existence inspection) is displayed, the
operations covered in steps (2) and (3) are not needed.
- If the MAIN OPS MENU used by the standard menus is displayed, please change to the simplified
menus screen. - See page 6-5.
(2) Select menu
[SELECT MENU]
1STANDARD MENU (STD RUN-MENU)
2SIMPLIFIED MENU (SEL EASY MENU)
1
1.Move the cursor to the [2SIMLIFIED MENU] item with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The [SIMLIFIED MENU] menu screen will appear.
(3) Placing the object to be measured (existence inspection)
[SIMPLIFIED MENU]
1
1MEAS OBJ
2SELECT CAMERA
3XY CORRECTION
OPS-MENU
3
POSITIONING EXISTENCE
CAM1 CAM1&2
2
NO YES
1. Move the cursor to the "1MEAS OBJ" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
2. Move the cursor to "EXISTENCE" using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the "OPS-MENU" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
- The MAIN OPS MENU for existence inspection will be displayed.
9
(4) Registration of an object type number (IV-S33M is registered in 00 in this example)
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 H FULL VX.XX MEAS XXXXms 2000-10-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT1 EXISTENCE
1
00 ×
01 ×
02 ×
03 ×
04 ×
05 ×
06 ×
07 ×
08 ×
09 ×
10 ×
11 ×
12 ×
13 ×
14 ×
15 ×
16 ×
17 ×
18 ×
19 ×
20 ×
21 ×
22 ×
23 ×
24 ×
25 ×
26 ×
27 ×
28 ×
29 ×
30 ×
31 ×
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
40 ×
41 ×
42 ×
43 ×
44 ×
45 ×
46 ×
47 ×
48 ×
49 ×
50 ×
51 ×
52 ×
53 ×
54 ×
55 ×
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
When the IV-S33M is used
When the IV-S31M is used 00 to 15
When the IV-S32M is used 00 to 31
2
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-TYPE EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL.
OPS-MENU SYS-COND ADJ-CONTRASTSAVE SHUTTER
1. Move the cursor to the X on the object type number 00 using the up and down keys. Then
press the SET key.
-The X will change to a circle meaning that the object type has been registered.
2. Move the cursor to the "EXIST-COND" item using the left and right keys, and press the SET
key.
- The measurement condition setting screen will be displayed.
To the next page
9-6
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Existence inspection)
Continued from the previous page
(5) Image adjustment
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- When the image is so bright that the menu display is difficult to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce the
brightness of the image. The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from "H" to "L."
1
F.IMG C1 L
Press the TRG/BRT key and the
brightness of the screen will change
between L and H.
Object to be measured 3
Indicates that Camera 1 is selected.
1REGISTER NO.
4
OPS-MENU
0(0~7) NO YES
5
6
2. To display the image of the object measured clearly, adjust the focus and iris opening of the camera lens
(page 4-1).
3. Press the SEL key to change the screen to the freeze mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T.IMG to F.IMG.
- To set a threshold for a binary area, make sure the IV-S30 is displaying the freeze screen.
(For details about the through and freeze modes, see page 7-4.)
4. Move the cursor to the "1REGISTER NO." item using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
5. Specify "0" for the registration number using the up and down keys.
6. Move the cursor to "YES" using the left and right keys.
- The measurement area will be displayed in the center of the screen.
7. Press the ESC key to display all of the measurement condition items.
(6) Setting the binary area condition (measurement area)
F.IMG C1 L
1
3
1REGISTER NO.
2MEAS AREA
3THRESHOLD
4INVERT B/W
0(0~7) NO YES
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)
2
NO YES
- If the menu overlaps the object to be
measured, so that further image condition
setting is difficult, press the ESC key. Only
item 1 will be displayed at a time.
Measurement area
OPS-MENU
1. Move the cursor to the "2MEAS AREA" item, and press the SET key.
2. Surround the object to be measured with the measurement area (solid line).
- Move the cursor to the "MOVE," "UP.L," or "LO. R," label and press the SET key.
MOVE
The whole rectangle is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
After the position has been finalized, press the SET key.
Measurement area
Object to be measured
- After specifying the position of each measurement area, press the SET key.
To the next page
9-7
9
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Existence inspection)
Continued from the previous page
(7) Setting the binary area conditions (threshold)
1
4
3THRESHOLD
4INVERT B/W
U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)
NO YES
5
OPS-MENU
6
1. Move the cursor to the "3THRESHOLD" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to the "L.LM" item with the left and right keys, and then press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to each digit using the left and right keys, and increase or decrease the values using the
up and down keys.
L.LM100(0~255)
This cursor will move to the left and right.
- To set the threshold parameters, see the section in the Glossary which describes them.
- After determining the lower limit, press the SET key, and then the ESC key.
Measurement area
4. Move the cursor to the "4INVERT B/W" item using the up
Object to be measured
and down keys, and press the SET key.
5. Move the cursor to "YES" using the left and right keys, and
press the SET key.
- Since only the number of white pixels can be measured,
select "YES" if the object is black.
6. Move the cursor to the "OPS-MENU" item using the up and
down keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
Inversion: NO
Inversion: YES
(8) Setting the evaluation conditions
1. Move the cursor to the "EXIST-EVAL." item using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The items 1 to 8 will be displayed.
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT1 EXISTENCE
9
3
①REG00 000000~245760 A00=
2
②REG01 000000~245760 A01=
③REG02 000000~245760 A02=
④REG03 000000~245760 A03=
⑤REG04 000000~245760 A04=
⑥REG05 000000~245760 A05=
1
⑦REG06 000000~245760 A06=
⑧REG07 000000~245760 A07=
X0~7
Y0~7
CHG-TYPE
5
READY
EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
2. Move the cursor to "1REG00" and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the upper limit position with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the digit to change with the left and right keys, and then set the value to 002000 with the up and
down keys.
1REG00
000000~002000
- After determining the upper limitm value, press the SET key, and then the ESC key.
4. Press the TRG/BRT key.
- The measurement (evaluation) results for item 1 and the image will be displayed.
Measurement result
Evaluation result
1REG00
000000~002000 A00=001619
2REG01000000~245760 A01=
3REG02000000~245760 A02=
OK
5. Press "ESC," and move the cursor to the "CHG-TYPE" item using the left and right keys, to confirm that
"Object type number 00" has been selected.
6. Move the cursor away from the "CHG-TYPE" item using the left and right keys.
To the next page
9-8
Operation Examples (Simplified menu: Existence inspection)
Continued from the previous page
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the result of measuring (evaluating) and image (search) area will be displayed.
(9) Existence inspection
[Display of the measured
result]
Final evaluation result (*1)
Measuring time
(TYPE00)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.XX
OK
MEAS XXXXms 2000-08-01 10:30
MEASUREMENT1 EXISTENCE
Area of registration number 00
(number of pixels) and
evaluation result
X0~7
Y0~7
CHG-TYPE
READY
EXIST-COND EXIST-EVAL. SEL-CAMERA
OPS-CND SYS-CND ADJ-CONTRAST SAVE SHUTTER
*2
*1 The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the
items have been evaluated as acceptable. If there is a single unacceptable item, "NG" will be displayed.
The only item evaluated in the existence inspection is the area. The result will be OK if it falls within the
evaluation conditions that are specified in step (8) (upper and lower limits).
*2 Although the specified data is temporarily stored in RAM memory, it is not stored in the flash memory.
So, you must save the data manually using the save operation. If you do not save the data in the flash
memory, it will be deleted when the IV-S30 controller is turned OFF. - See page 7-26.
9-9
9
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Area measurement by binary conversion)
9-2 Standard menu
[1] Area measurement by binary conversion
The following sections describe the operation for measuring the area of the object shown below. The
area is measured by counting the number of pixels after the image has been subjected to binary
processing.
Object to be measured (white)
(1) Power ON
When power is first turned ON after the machine is deliverd, the [SELECT MENU] screen will
appear.
- When the MAIN OPS MENU used by the simplified menus (positioning) is displayed, the
operations covered in step (2) is not needed.
- If the MAIN OPS MENU used by the standard menus is displayed, please change to the simplified
menus screen. - See page 6-5.
(2) Select menu
[SELECT MENU]
1STANDARD MENU (STD RUN-MENU)
1
2SIMPLIFIED MENU (SEL EASY MENU)
1.Move the cursor to the "1STANDARD MENU" item with the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
- The standard mode [MAIN OPS MENU] screen will appear.
(3) Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU (all the conditions are initialized)
(TYPE00)
9
T.IMG C1 L
VX.X
MEAS 0000ms XXXX-XX-XX XX:XX
MEASURE 0 CAM1 NO
X0~7
1
Y0~7
READY
CHG-MEA CHG-REG CHG-RST CHG-C1 CHG-C2 CHG-EVAL CUSTOM-MNU
OPS-CND MEA-CND SYS-CND CHG-TYPE NG-IMG-DSP NEXT-NG MANL-MEAS
1. Move the cursor to the "MEA-CND" item using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The "TYPE MEAS COND" menu will be displayed.
(4) Registration of an object type number (the object is registered in 00 with the IV-S33M)
[TYPE MEAS COND]
①OBJECT TYPE NO.
00(0~63) NO YES
1
*
2
OPS-MENU SAVE LOCK TITLE FINAL-CALC FINAL-OUTPUT I/O SYSTEM
[OBJECT REG.LIST]
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
××××××××××××××××
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
××××××××××××××××
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
××××××××××××××××
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
××××××××××××××××
* Object type number
IV-S33M: 00 to 63
IV-S32M: 00 to 31
IV-S31M: 00 to 15
Circles will be displayed
below object type number
that is already registered.
1. Move the cursor to the "1OBJECT TYPE NO." item using the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "YES" using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Items 2 to 8 will be displayed.
To the next page
9-10
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the previous page
(5) Setting the measurement number ("MEASUREMENT 1" is selected for the IV-S33M)
[TYPE MEAS COND]
1
3
1OBJECT TYPE NO.
2SELECT CAMRA
3IMG PRE-PROCESS
4MEASURE 0 CAM1
5MEASURE 0 CAM2
6MEASUREMENT 1
7MEASUREMENT 2
2
8MEASUREMENT 3
9MEASUREMENT 4
00(0~63) NO YES
CAM1&2 CAM1&NG-IMG
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO
(MEAS-COND) NO
NO
(MEAS-COND) NO
NO
(MEAS-COND)
NO
(MEAS-COND)
NO
(MEAS-COND)
NO
(MEAS-COND)
OPS-MENU SAVE LOCK TITLE FINAL-CALC FINAL-OUTPUT I/O SYSTEM
[MEASUREMENT 1]
1MEAS SELECTION
NO POSI-DEVIATION CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
INSPECT-BGA/CSP
MEAS-BIN-AREA CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS MULTI-POSI MULTI-MATCHES
2SELECT CAMERA
CAM1 CAM2
3CHNG GRAY LEBEL NO YES(00.0TIMES γ+ γ - CHNG-L INCRS-M)
4SPACE FILTER
NO
NUM-OF-TIMES 0(0~5)
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK
1. Move the cursor to the "5MEASUREMENT 1" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "NO" using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the "1MEAS SELECTION" item in the lower part of the window using the up and down
keys. Then press the SET key.
(6) Setting the measurement program
[TYPE MEAS COND]
9
[MEASUREMENT 1]
1MEAS SELECTION
1
2SELECT CAMERA
3CHNG GRAY LEBEL
4SPACE FILTER
NO POSI-DEVIATION CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
INSPECT-BGA/CSP
MEAS-BIN-AREA CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS MULTI-POSI MULTI-MATCHES
CAM1 CAM2
NO YES(00.0TIMES γ+ γ - CHNG-L INCRS-M)
NO
NUM-OF-TIMES 0(0~5)
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK
1. Move the cursor to the "MEAS-BIN-AREA" item using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
2. Press the ESC key.
(7) Setting the registration number (00 is selected in this example)
[TYPE MEAS COND]
6MEASUREMENT 1 MEAS-BIN-AREA C1 (MEAS-COND)
1
[MEAS COND]
2
4
3
7WINDOW
NUM-OF-MASKS(1 2 4) BINARY-IMG-MASK
8REGISTER NO. 00(0~15) NO YES
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
REGISTER NO.
9BINARY AREA COND ○ × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
NUMERIC CALC × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK EVALUATION NUM-CALC OUT-COND
5
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK EVALUATION NUM-CALC OUT-COND
To the next page
9-11
1. Move the cursor to "MEAS-COND" using the
left and right keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to the "2REGISTER NO."
item in the lower part of the window using
the up and down keys. Then press the SET
key.
3. Move the cursor to "YES" using the left and
right keys, and press the SET key.
4. Move the cursor to the "3BINARY AREA
COND" item using the up and down keys,
and press the SET key.
5. Move the cursor to the circle below the
registration number 00, and press the SET
key.
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the previous page
3
(8) Image adjustment
1
T.IMG C1 L
Press the TRG/BRT key and the
brightness of the screen will change
between L and H.
Measurement area
Indicates that Camera 1 is selected.
1REGISTER NO.
0(0~15)
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- When the image is so bright that the menu display is difficult to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce
the brightness of the image. The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from "H"
to "L."
2. To display the image of the object measured clearly, adjust the focus and iris opening of the camera lens
(page 4-1).
3. Press the SEL key to change the screen to the freeze mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T.IMG to F.IMG.
- To set a threshold for a binary area, make sure the machine is displaying the freeze screen.
(For details about the through and freeze modes, see page 7-4.)
4. Press the ESC key to display all of the binary area conditions.
(9) Setting the binary area condition (measurement area)
1
9
①REGISTER NO.
②MEAS SHAPE
③MEAS AREA
④MASK SHAPE
00(0~15)
RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
MOVE UP.L(224,208) LO.R(287,271)
NO RECTANGLE CIRCLE ELLIPSE
2
⑤AUTO REGIST
EXEC(L LIMIT ONRY U&L LIMITS)
⑥THRESHOLD
U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)
⑦INVERT B/W
NO YES
⑧BINARY PROCESS
FIXED THRESHOLD-ADJ(VAR-DIFF VAR-RATE)
⑨BINARY NOISE FILT
NO EXPD.→CONTR. CONTR.→EXPD
⑩NUM.OF FILT PASS
EXPD.0 CONTR.0(0~5)
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK EVALUATION - If the menu overlaps the object to be measured,
so that further image condition setting is
difficult, press the ESC key. Only one item will
be displayed at a time.
- The image shown in the measurement area has
already been through binary conversion.
1. Move the cursor to the "3MEAS AREA" item, and press the SET key.
2. Surround the object to be measured with the measurement area (RECTANGLE: solid line).
- Move the cursor to the "MOVE," "UP.L," or "LO. R," label and press the SET key.
After the position has been finalized, press the SET key.
MOVE
The whole rectangle is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
Object to be measured
(white)
Measurement area
- After determining each position in the measurement area, press the SET key.
To the next page
9-12
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the previous page
(10) Setting the binary area conditions (threshold)
6THRESHOLD
U.LM255 L.LM100(0~255)
2
1
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK EVALUATION
4
1. Move the cursor to the "6THRESHOLD" item using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to the "L.LM" item and then press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to each digit using the left and right keys, and increase or decrease the values using the
up and down keys.
L.LM100(0~255)
This cursor will move to the left and right.
- To set the threshold parameters, see the section in the Glossary which describes them.
- After determining the lower limit, press the SET key, and then the ESC key.
4. Move the cursor to the bottom line using the up and down keys, and select the "EVALUATION" item
using the left and right keys. Then press the SET key.
- The [EVALUATION COND] menu will be displayed.
(11) Setting the evaluation conditions and result output
[EVALUATION COND]
1
4
①CHNG REG
[TEST RESULT]
[OUTPUT]
②CONDITION SET RESET AUTO(±10%)
③REGISTER 00 000000~245760
A00=
NO
④REGISTER 01 000000~245760
⑤REGISTER 02 000000~245760
⑥REGISTER 03 000000~245760
⑦REGISTER 04 000000~245760
⑧REGISTER 05 000000~245760
⑨REGISTER 06 000000~245760
⑩REGISTER 07 000000~245760
⑪TEST
EXEC (WITH-POSI.ADJ WITHOUT-POSI.ADJ)
3
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK
1. Move the cursor to "2REGISTER 00" and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to the upper limit position with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the digit to change with the left and right keys, and then set the value to 002000 with the up and
down keys.
2REGISTER 00
000000~002000
- After specifying the upper limit value, press the SET key, and then the ESC key.
3. Move the cursor to "OUTPUT" using the left and right keys.
- Select "Y0" using the up and down keys, and press the SET keys.
[OUTPUT]
Y0
4. Move the cursor to the "OPS-MENU" item using the up and down keys.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
To the next page
9-13
9
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Area measurement by binary conversion)
Continued from the previous page
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the size of the area measured will be displayed as the number of pixels contained
within the area.
(12) Area measurement
[Display of the measured result]
Final evaluation result (*1)
(TYPE00)
Measuring time
MEAS XXXXms XXXX-XX-XX XX:XX
MEASUREMENT 1 MEAS-BIN-AREA
Area of registration number 00
(number of pixels) and evaluation
result
F.IMG C1 L
VX.X
OK
A00=001884
A01=
A02=
A03=
A04=
A05=
A06=
A07=
OK
*2
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-MEA CHG-REG CHG-RST CHG-C1
CHG-C2 CHG-EVAL CUSTOM-MNU
OPS-CND MEA-CND SYS-CND CHG-TYPE NEXT-NG RE-EXAM-NG MANL-MEAS
*1 The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the
items have been evaluated acceptable. If there is a single unacceptable item, "NG" will be displayed.
The only item used for the evaluation in the area measurement by binary conversion is the area. The result
will be OK if it falls within the evaluation conditions that are specified in step (11) (upper and lower limits).
*2 When the evaluation result is OK, Y0 will be turned ON because we set it that way in step (11), and a filled
box will be displayed. (If the result is NG, an empty box will be displayed.)
9
Saving data
- Although the specified data is temporarily stored in RAM memory, it is not stored in the flash memory.
So, you must save the data manually using the save operation. If you do not save the data in the flash
memory, it will be deleted when the IV-S30 controller is turned OFF.
- You can save data at any time using the "SAVE" item on the [TYPE MEAS COND], [TYPE RUN COND],
or [SYSTEM COND] menu.
[TYPE MEAS COND] menu
[TYPE MEAS COND]
①OBJECT TYPE NO.
②SELECT CAMERA
00(0~63) NO YES
CAM1&2 CAM1&NG-IMG
1
OPS-MENU SAVE LOCK TITLE FINAL-CALC FINAL-OUTPUT I/O SYSTEM
1. On each menu screen, move the cursor to "SAVE" using the up/down and left/right keys, and
press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save the data?) (YES=[SET]/NO=[ESC])
2. Press the SET key.
- The IV-S30 will start saving the data and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the
screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMG ■■
SYSTEM I/O
■
OBJECT TYPE COND ■■■■■■■■■■■□□□□□
When the data has been saved in the IV-S30 flash memory, the display will change from
"SAVING" to "COMPLETE SAVE."
9-14
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Positional deviation measurement)
[2] Positional deviation measurement
The following sections cover an example of how to measure the positional deviation of the positioning
mark shown below.
Positioning mark
(1) Power ON
When power is first turned ON after the machine is deliverd, the [SELECT MENU] screen will
appear.
- When the MAIN OPS MENU used by the simplified menus (positioning) is displayed, the
operations covered in step (2) is not needed.
- If the MAIN OPS MENU used by the standard menus is displayed, please change to the simplified
menus screen. - See page 6-5.
(2) Select menu
[SELECT MENU]
1
1STANDARD MENU (STD RUN-MENU)
2SIMPLIFIED MENU (SEL EASY MENU)
1.Move the cursor to the "1STANDARD MENU" item with the up and down keys, and press the
SET key.
- The standard mode [MAIN OPS MENU] screen will appear.
(3) Operation on the MAIN OPS MENU (all the conditions are initialized)
(TYPE00)
T.IMG C1 L
VX.X
MEAS 0000ms XXXX-XX-XX XX:XX
MEASURE 0 CAM1 NO
X0∼7
9
Y0∼7
READY
CHG-MEA CHG-REG CHG-RST CHG-C1 CHG-C2 CHG-EVAL CUSTOM-MNU
1
OPS-CND MEA-CND SYS-CND CHG-TYPE NG-IMG-DSP NEXT-NG MANL-MEAS
1. Move the cursor to the "MEA-CND" item using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The [TYPE MEAS COND] menu will be displayed.
(4) Registration of an object type number (the object is registered in 00 with the IVS33M)
[TYPE MEAS COND]
①OBJECT TYPE NO.
1
00(0~63) NO YES
*
2
OPS-MENU SAVE LOCK TITLE FINAL-CALC FINAL-OUTPUT I/O SYSTEM
[OBJECT REG.LIST]
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
××××××××××××××××
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
××××××××××××××××
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
××××××××××××××××
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
××××××××××××××××
* Object type number
IV-S33M: 00 to 63
IV-S32M: 00 to 31
IV-S31M: 00 to 15
Circles will be displayed
below object type numbers
that are already registered.
1. Move the cursor to the "1OBJECT TYPE NO." item using the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "YES" using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Items 2 to 8 will be displayed.
To the next page
9-15
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Positional deviation measurement)
Continued from the previous page
(5) Setting the measurement number ("MEASUREMENT 1" is selected with the IV-S33M)
1
3
[TYPE MEAS COND]
①OBJECT TYPE
②SELECT CAMERA
③IMG PRE-PROCESS
④MEASURE 0 CAM1
⑤MEASURE 0 CAM2
⑥MEASUREMENT 1
⑦MEASUREMENT 2 2
⑧MEASUREMENT 3
⑨MEASUREMENT 4
NO.00(0~63) NO YES
CAM1&2 CAM1&NG-IMG
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
NO
(MEAS-COND) NO
NO
(MEAS-COND) NO
NO
(MEAS-COND)
NO
(MEAS-COND)
NO
(MEAS-COND)
NO
(MEAS-COND)
OPS-MENU SAVE LOCK TITLE FINAL-CALC FINAL-OUTPUT I/O SYSTEM
4
[MEASUREMENT 1]
①MEAS SELECTION
NO POSI-DEVIATION CHK-DEG-MATCH
INSPECT-LEAD
INS PECT-BGA/CSP
MEAS-BIN-AREA CNT-BIN-OBJ LABEL-BIN-OBJ
POINT-MEAS MULTI-POSI MULTI-MATCHES
②SELECT CAMERA
CAM1 CAM2
③CHNG GRAY LEBEL
NO YES(00.0TIMES γ+ γ - CHNG-L INCRS-M)
④SPACE FILTER
NO
NUM-OF-TIMES 0(0~5)
1. Move the cursor to the
"5MEASUREMENT 1" item using the
up and down keys, and press the SET
key.
2. Move the cursor to "NO" using the left
and right keys, and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the "1MEAS SELECTION" item on the lower window
using the up and down keys. Then
press the SET key.
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK
(6) Setting the registration number and the mode (REGISTER NO. 0 and 1P-SCH are selected
in this example)
[TYPE MEAS COND]
⑥MEASUREMENT 1 MEAS-BIN-AREA C1 (MEAS-COND)
1
9
2
4
[MEAS COND]
①DTECT PRECISION STANDARD HIGH 3
②REGISTER NO. 0(0~7) NO 1P-SCH 2P-SCH
1P-EDGE 2P-EDGE 1P-SCH+1P-EDGE
③DTECT ANGL
NO YES(±15° ±30° ±45゜360°)
REGISTER NO. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
④MDL 0
S×××××××
5 ××××××××
⑤MDL 1
NUMERIC CALC × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK EVALUATION DST&ANGL NUM-CALC OUT-COND
3
(7) Image adjustment
1. Move the cursor to "MEAS-COND"
using the left and right keys, and press
the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to the "2REGISTER
NO." item on the lower window using
the up and down keys. Then press the
SET key.
3. Move the cursor to "1P-SCH" using the
left and right keys, and press the SET
key.
4. Move the cursor to the "4MDL 0" item
using the up and down keys, and press
the SET key.
5. Move the cursor to the "S" below the
registration number 00, and press the
SET key.
1
T.IMG C1 L
1REGISTER NO.
Reference area
Press the TRG/BRT key and the
brightness of the screen will change
between L and H.
Search area
Indicates that Camera 1 is selected.
0(0~7)
1. Press the SEL key.
- The image taken by camera 1 will be displayed.
- When the image is so bright that the menu display is difficult to see, press the TRG/BRT key to reduce
the brightness of the image. The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from "H"
to "L."
2. To display the image of the object measured clearly, adjust the focus and iris opening of the camera lens
(page 4-1).
3. Press the SEL key to change the screen to the freeze mode.
- The indicator in the upper right corner of the screen will change from T.IMG to F.IMG.
- To set a threshold for a binary area, make sure the machine is displaying the freeze screen.
(For details about the through and freeze modes, see page 7-4.)
4. Press the ESC key to display all of the gray scale search conditions.
To the next page
9-16
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Positional deviation measurement)
Continued from the previous page
(6) Setting the gray scale search conditions
①REGISTER NO.
②MEAS SHAPE(MDL0)
③REF IMG(MDL0)
④REF IMG ARE(MDL0)
1
3
⑤SEARCH ARE(MDL0)
⑥DTECT CRD(MDL0)
⑦CONTR.PIXL(MDL0)
0(0~7)
- If the menu overlaps the object to be
RECTANGLE X-LINE Y-LINE
measured, so that further image condition
NEW EXIST000(000~000)
MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279) CONTRAST SR setting is difficult, press the ESC key. Only
one item will be displayed at a time.
REG DISP
MOVE UP.L(216,200) LO.R(295,279)
CENTER FREE(255,239)
1 2 3
2
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK EVALUATION 5
1. Move the cursor to the "4REF. IMG ARE (MDL 0)" item, and press the SET key.
2. Surround the object to be measured with the reference image area (solid line).
- Move the cursor to the "MOVE," "UP.L," or "LO. R," label and press the SET key.
MOVE
The whole rectangle is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
UP.L
The upper left corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
LO.R
The lower right corner is moved using the up, down, left or right keys (one pixel at a time).
After the position has been finalized, press the SET key.
Reference image area
Positioning mark
- After the reference image area position has been set, move the cursor to the "REG." item using the left
and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The stored image will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. After storing the image, press
the ESC key.
3. Press the ESC key and move the cursor to the "5SEARCH ARE (MDL 0)" item. Then, press the SET key.
4. Create a search area (dotted line).
- The search area described above is the range for detecting the image registered in step 2, using the gray
scale search function (see the Glossary).
- The procedure for creating the search area is the same as described for the reference image area in step
2.
Search area
- After determining the search area position, press the ESC key.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom line using the up and down keys, and select the "EVALUATION" item using
the left and right keys. Then press the SET key.
- The [EVALUATION COND] menu will be displayed.
To the next page
9-17
9
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Positional deviation measurement)
Continued from the previous page
(9) Setting the position evaluation conditions
[EVALUATION COND]
①REGISTER NO.
0(0~7)
②CONDITION SET RESET ③X COORD.(MDL0)
000.0~511.0 X0=
④Y COORD.(MDL0)
000.0~479.0
⑤x DEVIATE(MDL0)
-511.0~+511.0
⑥y DEVIATE(MDL0)
-479.0~+479.0
⑦MATCH LVL(MDL0)
-10000~+10000
1
2
3
OPS-MENU RETURN
4
[TEST RESULT]
[OUTPUT]
AUTO(±10%)
NO
Y0=
NO
x0=
NO
y0=
NO
M0=
NO
LOCK
1. Move the cursor to the "1REGISTER NO." item using the up and down keys, and press the SET
key. Select "0" using the up and down keys, and press the SET key.
2. Move the cursor to "6MATCH LVL (MDL0)" and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to the lower limit position with the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- Select the digit to change with the left and right keys, and then set the value to +09000 with the up
and down keys.
(Criteria for a successful match: 90.00% to 100.00%)
⑦MATCH LVL(MDL0)
+09000~+10000
- After specifying the lower limit value, press the SET key, and then the ESC key.
4. Move the cursor to the bottom line using the up and down keys, and select the "RETURN" item using
the left and right keys. Then press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the gray scale search menu.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom line using the up and down keys, and select the "RETURN" item using
the left and right keys. Then press the SET key.
-The screen will return to the [TYPE MEAS COND] menu.
[TYPE MEAS COND]
9
①OBJECT TYPE NO.
②SELECT CAMERA
③IMG PRE-PROCESS
00(0~63) NO YES
CAM1&2 CAM1&NG-IMG
(TO NEXT SUB-MENU)
OPS-MENU SAVE LOCK TITLE FINAL-CALC FINAL-OUTPUT I/O SYSTEM
7
6. Press the ESC key three times.
7. Move the cursor to the "FINAL-OUTPUT" item using the up/down and left/right keys. Then press the
SET key.
- The [FINAL OUTPUT COND] menu will be displayed.
To the next page
9-18
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Positional deviation measurement)
Continued from the previous page
(10) Setting the final evaluation output condition
1. Move the cursor to "1PAGE.NO." (register number) and press the SET key. Move the cursor to YES
and press the SET key.
- The items 2 to 5 will be displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
[FINAL OUTPUT COND]
1PAGE NO.
0(0~7) NO YES
3
2SET POSITION
MOVE
3INPUT SIGNAL
AUX-RLY C112(0~127) EXT-INP X0(0~7)
TMR TM0(0~7)
CNTR CN0(0~7)
AN00(0~15)
OUT Y00(0~15)
4LOGIC SYMBOL
DEL
5OUTPUT SIGNAL
OUT Y00(0~15)
AUX-RLY C000(0~127)
TMR TM0(0~7)
SET-VL000(000~999)
CNTR CN0(0~7)
SET-VL000(000~999)
DEL
1
OPS-MENU RETURN LOCK
[PAGE0]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUT
INPUT0
LOGIC
INPUT1
2
LOGIC
INPUT2
LOGIC
INPUT3
LOGIC
2. Move the cursor to "2SET POSITION" (position to set) and press the SET key.
- Move the cursor to the 0th column of INPUT 0 for logic setting using the up, down, left and right keys,
and press the SET key.
3. Move the cursor to "3INPUT SIGNAL" and press the SET key.
- Select AUXRLY C000 (0 to 127) with the left and right keys, change the setting to "C112" with the up
and down keys, and press the SET key.
- A logic symbol will be displayed in the 0 column of INPUT 0.
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 OUTPUT
C112
4. Move the cursor to "5OUTPUT SIGNAL" and press the SET key.
- Select OUT.Y00 (0 to 15) with the left and right keys. Specify Y00 with the up and down keys, and
press the SET key.
- A symbol indicating an output coil for INPUT 0 will be displayed.
[PAGE0]
INPUT0
LOGIC
0
1
2
3
4
5
C112
6
7 OUTPUT
Y00
5. Move the cursor to the "RETURN" item using the up/down and left/right keys. Then press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the [TYPE MEAS COND] menu.
To the next page
9-19
9
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Positional deviation measurement)
Continued from the previous page
(11) Saving data
Although the specified data is temporarily stored in RAM memory, it is not stored in the flash
memory. So, you must save the data manually using the save operation. If you do not save the
data in the flash memory, it will be deleted when the IV-S30 controller is turned OFF.
- You can save data at any time using the "SAVE" item on the [TYPE MEAS COND], [TYPE RUN
COND], or [SYSTEM COND] menu.
(In this example, data is saved while in the [TYPE MEAS COND] menu.)
[TYPE MEAS COND]
①OBJECT TYPE NO.
②SELECT CAMERA
00(0~63) NO YES
CAM1&2 CAM1&NG-IMG
1
3
OPS-MENU SAVE LOCK TITLE FINAL-CALC FINAL-OUTPUT I/O SYSTEM
1. Move the cursor to the "SAVE" item using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The following message will be displayed on the screen.
DATA SAVE? (Do you want to save the data?) (YES=[SET]/NO=[ESC])
2. Press the SET key.
- The IV-S30 will start saving the data and the progress will be displayed on the bottom of the
screen.
SAVING
REFERENCE IMG ■■
SYSTEM I/O
■
OBJECT TYPE COND ■■■■■■■■■■■□□□□□
When the data has been saved in the IV-S30 flash memory, the display will change from
"SAVING" to "COMPLETE SAVE."
9
3. Move the cursor to the "OPS-MENU" item using the left and right keys, and press the SET key.
- The screen will return to the MAIN OPS MENU.
To the next page
9-20
Operation Examples (Standard menu: Positional deviation measurement)
Continued from the previous page
Press the TRG/BRT key, and the result of the positional deviation measurement of the registered positioning
mark will be displayed.
(12) Positional deviation measurement
[Display of the measured
result]
Final evaluation result (*1)
Measuring time
Registration number
Detection coordinates of the
reference image
Amount of deviation from the
reference image
Degree of match of the
reference image (*2)
F.IMG C1 L
VX.X
(TYPE00)
OK
MEAS XXXXms 1999-08-01 10:30
MEASURE 0 CAM1 POSI-DEVIATION
REGISTER NO(0~7)
X0=379.0
OK
Y0=214.0
OK
x0=+001.0
OK
y0=+000.0
OK
M0=+09735
OK
B0=
X0~7
Y0~7
READY
CHG-MEA CHG-REG CHG-RST CHG-C1
CHG-C2 CHG-EVAL CUSTOM-MNU
OPS-CND MEA-CND SYS-CND CHG-TYPE NEXT-NG RE-EXAM-NG MANL-MEAS
*3
*1 The final evaluation result will be displayed as "OK" in the upper left corner of the screen when all of the
items have been evaluated acceptable.
If there is a single unacceptable item, "NG" will be displayed.
*2 "M0 +09735" means that the degree of match (percentage of pixels that match) between pixels in the
stored image and the measured image is 97.35%.
[The acceptance and rejection criteria based on the degree of match]
In order to evaluate acceptability based on the degree of match, first an image of a good specimen is
stored for reference. Then, an image of defective specimen is compared for degree of match. Finally an
image of another good specimen is compared. These comparisons establish the degree of match to be
used for setting the limits used for working comparisons.
For example, the degree of match for a non-defective object is 90% or more and that for a defective
object is 70% or less, then the threshold value for degree of match can be set to approx. 85%. This
allows the evaluation acceptability to be made.
*3 When the final evaluation result is OK, Y0 is turned ON, and a filled box is displayed. (When the result
is NG, an empty box is displayed.)
When the auxiliary relay C112 is turned ON, Y0 is turned ON according to the condition set in step (10)
for final evaluation output.
- For details about saving data, see page 9-14.
9-21
9
Glossary
Glossary
[A]
Ë Area filter
A function used to eliminate an island if its area is smaller that the specified size after each of the objects
in an image have been identified.
Ë Arrangement of the square pixels
This refers to CCD elements whose pixels are square and arranged at the same vertical and horizontal
interval.
If this type of CCD element is used, length corrections do not need to be calculated and the precision and
processing time do not deteriorate.
Rectangular grid
Square grid
1.28
1
1
1
CCD pick-up elements
One pixel
The aspect ratio is 1: 1.
Ë Artifact processing
Artifact processing is a method of processing that eliminates the false detection of the edge of the target
object when an artifact is in the line being scanned. This process can be used during edge detection. The
real edge of the target object is detected by computing the average duration of the dark area.
[Example of detection]
- An example of light to dark averaging (DTCT MODE: BRT - DRK) while scanning horizontally
(SEARCH DIR.: HORIZ -), with artifact processing (enabled) .
Duration of dark area
in the line scan
Average light level (vertical)
Edge detection point
(with artifact processing: enabled)
When artifact processing is disabled in the above example, the edge detection point changes.
Edge detection point (with artifact processing: disabled)
[B]
Ë Binary image
Pixels in images are converted to one of two values, "1" when the pixel is lighter than the specified
threshold value (level), and "0" when it is darker than the specified threshold value (level).
G-1
G
Glossary
Variation in
lighting
Ë Binary processing (fixed/threshold value correction)
By setting THESHLD. ADJ (threshold adjustment function), the IV-S30 can cope with variations in lighting.
Note: In order to use the THRESHOLD
(threshold adjustment function), the
monitor brightness functions must
be selected to measure variations
in lighting. If you don’t select the
Fixed
monitor brightness function, a
BINARY CORR.: LIGHT LVL NOT
SET (correcting binary value:
monitor illumination not selected)
error will occur.
Threshold correction value
Fails to convert the image
due to a variation in lighting
Ë Boundary processing
- See “Setting window boundaries (enable/disable).”
[C]
Ë CCD (charge capture device)
A charge capture device (CCD) converts light into electric signals. It consists of a photo-electric converter
to convert light and store it as an electric charge signal, a scanner to read the stored electric charges, and
an output section to transmit the signals as a stream of data.
G
Ë CCD trigger
The CCD trigger allows sampling a part of the CCD camera image at high speed. When the sampled
image changes, the camera starts the shutter operation to capture a new image. With this built-in shutter
operation, an external sensor, such as a photo sensor, is not needed to trigger the shutter. A window can
be created to trigger the shutter operation. The window can be set for each item on the production line so
that adjustments to the position of an external sensor are no longer needed. This feature reduces the
down time needed to change object types on production lines.
object type 1
Feed
direction
object type 2
Feed
direction
Window for triggering the shutter operation
Ë Center of gravity
The "center of gravity" is the geographical center of the image. It is determined by treating the binary
image to be measured as an object that has mass.
Ë C mount
A system for mounting lenses on a camera body. The flange back (the distance from the reference level
for mounting a lens to the focal plane surface) is defined as 17.526 mm.
Ë Computer link
Programmable controllers (PC) are equipped with communication protocols. The "computer link" is used
to transfer data between the PC and an external computer, or the like, using this communication protocol.
The IV-S30 supports the computer link protocols used by Sharp, Omron, and Mitsubishi PCs. Therefore,
the PC does not need a custom communication program in order to create a computer link with the IVS30.
Ë Contraction
- See "Expansion and contraction to eliminate binary noise in the image."
G-2
Glossary
[E]
Ë Edge emphasis
- See "Space filter."
Ë Edge extraction
- See "Space filter."
Ë Edge detection
The "edge" refers to the boundaries between the brighter (white) and darker (black) parts in an image.
The "edge detection" function is used to detect this boundary by processing the image.
Edge
width
A
B
Flat
width
Brightness
A
Edge
Difference
in darkness
level
Scanning direction B
[An example of detecting a point using the edge detection function and user specified criteria]
- Horizontal transition point
from light to dark (moving
from left to right)
A
Detection area
B
B
Detection direction
A
Detection area
A
B
Detection direction
Light
↑
Brightness
level
↓
Dark
Edge Flat
width width
Difference
in level
Edge detection
point
B
Light
↑
Brightness
level
↓
Dark
Direction
A
- Vertical transition point from
light to dark (moving from
bottom to top)
Detection
direction
- Horizontal transition point
from light to dark (moving
from right to left)
Detection
direction
point
Edge detection point
A
- Vertical transition point from
light to dark (moving from top
to bottom) Edge detection
B
Edge Flat
width width
Difference
in level
A
Direction
B
- Center (dark), horizontal (left and right)
Edge detection point
Detection area
- Edge detection of the inside and outside edges of a two circles
A: Moving right horizontally
from light to dark
B: Moving right horizontally
from dark to light
C: Moving left horizontally
from dark to light
D: Moving left horizontally
from light to dark
Internal diameter (between B and C)
External diameter (between A and D)
Detection area
Ë Expansion
- See "Expansion and contraction to elimiate binary noise in the image."
G-3
G
Glossary
Contraction
Expansion
Binary
conversion
Ë Expansion and contraction to eliminate binary noise in the image
When an image is converted to black and white, a number of unwanted dots may appear in the image.
These noises can be eliminated during the preliminary processing. Dot control processing of binary values is used to eliminate this problem, as described below.
- 1 Expansion
If a white area contains a single, isolated black point, the system will interrupt the black point to
white.
2 Contraction
If a black area contains a single, isolated white point, the system will convert the white point to
black.
- 1 Expansion _ contraction
Delete isolated black points by expansion and then restore the original image size by contraction.
Expansion
Contraction
Binary
conversion
2Contraction _ expansion
Delete isolated white points by contraction and then restore the original image size by expansion.
[F]
Fillet height
(vertical)
G
Ë Fillet width (shading width)
Size of a hollow rectangle which closely matches to the target object in a binary image (white part).
Horizontal direction: Length of a side parallel to the X axis. Vertical direction: Length of a side parallel to
the Y axis.
Fillet width (horizontal)
Ë Flat width
- See "Edge detection."
G-4
Glossary
Ë Full pixel reading (progressive scan)
A system which reads all of pixels of image information from the CCD element one after another is
referred to as "full pixel reading system." This system provides the same high resolution for moving
objects as it does for static objects.
On the other hand, conventional CCDs using the NTSC scanning technique must read an object two
times. First the odd lines are read and then the even lines. Therefore, NTSC system produces blurry
images of moving objects. In order to solve this problem, the NTSC system can read only the odd lines.
The disadvantage is that only half the resolution is available.
Conventional NTSC system
Odd line
Even line
Full pixel reading system
CCD
Odd line
Even line
Full lines
Image signal
[G]
Ë Gray scale check using the normalization correlation method
Even when the IV-S30 is looking at the same object as the object used for the reference image, the new
target image and the previously stored reference image may not match completely, due to variations in
the illumination conditions and the ambient light.
In order to check the resemblance between the two sets of image data, the normalization correlation
method can be used.
In order to check whether or not the levels match using the normalization correlation method, the system
slides the reference image one pixel at a time in the measurement objective range (measurement window), and calculates correlation value between the reference image and the target image. The position
where the maximum correlation value can be obtained is treated as the position where the target image
might exist, and the IV-S30 calculates resemblance level at this position.
The normalization correlation method also can be applied to binary images. However, gray scale images
(images with shades of light) contain large volumes of information, compared with binary images (images
with 256 levels of gray have 256 times the volume of information than in binary images). Therefore, grayscale images offer more precision and more reliable results.
However, the larger the information volume, the larger the number of calculations that must be made for
correlation values. This means that high speed processing hardware and software are required to use
the normalization correlation method on the gray scale images.
Ë Gray scale processing (gray image processing)
This is a process used to handle the unmodified captured image data, obtained from the CCD camera. In
other words, the image data is not converted to binary values.
- This process produces more precise results than binary image processing (one pixel = one bit) by using
8 bits (one pixel = 256 gray levels) to represent each pixel in a gray scale image.
[Advantage]
Theoretically, better precision and reliability can be offered because the image contains
more information about the brightness of each pixel in the image.
[Disadvantage] More processing time is required because this approach must handle a large amount of
data.
G-5
G
Glossary
Ë Gray scale search (corrected gray scale search)
The "gray scale search" function is a system for detecting a point where the input image and the reference image match, after calculating the matching levels in the input image and the reference image.
[Procedures]
1 Store the reference image as a gray scale image with 256 levels of gray.
2 Capture the workpiece image to be measured.
3 Move the captured image of the object so that the upper left corner of the captured image is right
on top of the upper left edge of the reference image. Calculates the level of matching between
the two images, based on the stored gray scale image data.
4 Slide the reference image over one pixel width and then measure the level of matching at that
position.
5 Repeat step 4 above for the whole workpiece image until a good match is found.
(Output)
Maximum matching level value
The center coordinates where the highest
level of matching is obtained
(Application)
Shape inspection
Positional deviation measurement
Reference image
Detected image
Search range in the image
[H]
G
Ë Halogen lamp
Light source with halogen gas in the bulb. When a halogen lamp is lit, the halogen gas and vaporized
tungsten combine. When the filament is heated, these combined particles reattach to the tungsten, in
stead of being deposited on the glass bulb, so that the original brightness of the lamp is maintained
throughout its life span.
Ë High frequency lighting
If a fluorescent lamp is powered by commercial electricity, it will flicker at 50 Hz or 60 Hz. Since the
CCD scans images at 60 Hz, the brightness of the image may fluctuate due to the flickering of the
fluorescent lamp.
By increasing frequency used to power the fluorescent lamp (employing a high frequency light), this
type interference is eliminated and a stable image can be obtained.
Ë Histogram widening
This is a method to widen the histogram for an image in which the histogram only occupies part of the
available scale, thus improving the contrast. For example, in figure 1, the gray level values are concentrated in the [a, b] part of the range, and the [0, a] and [b, Zm] parts of the range are not used (the
histogram is not expanded to use all of the gray scalel values). This image has low contrast, since the
image does not use the full dynamic range efficiently. Expand the histogram to cover the entire range of
gray scale values, as shown in figure 2. The contrast will be improved.
0
a
b
Gray level
Zm
1 Low contrast image
0
Gray level
Zm
2 Good contrast image
G-6
Glossary
[I]
Ë Illumination monitor alarm density setting
The "illumination (light level) monitor" is a function which automatically monitors the environmental lighting conditions when measuring objects.
If the illuminance exceeds the alarm density setting, the IV-S30 will display an alarm message.
Ë Interline transfer system
The interline transfer system is a system for transferring electrical charges from the CCD receiving elements to the read-out matrix.
The frame transfer system is a system for transferring electrical charge which uses the photo sensitive
area to read out the charges. This system is subject to smearing noise since the area is used for both
receiving and transferring the image.
Ë Island
An "island" is a separate area which is created after labeling (object identification) process of the binary
image.
[M]
Ë Main axis angle
The acute angle between the longitudinal and horizontal axes of a shape in the image after the measurement object is converted to binary. This angle cannot be measured for nearly circular or square-shaped
objects.
+30˚
-30˚
Ë Mask window
The image being examined may contain an area that does not need to be processed. To eliminate such
an area, a mask window is used.
Measurement window
Object to be measured
Mask window
Ë Mid gray level emphasis
Emphasize the mid gray level. This improves contrast while remaining the background image.
Output image gray level
255
L=Level
W=Width
255
L
W
Input image gray level
G-7
G
Glossary
[N]
Ë Normalization correlation
To determine whether the levels between the reference image and the input image match, the IV-S30
uses an information processing method called "normalization correlation." This is a method used to calculate relationship between two groups of data.
- Factors determining the correlation value
If the densities of the two images have the same tendency (positive correlation), the two images are
said to resemble each other. If the densities of the two images have opposite tendencies (negative
correlation), the two images are said not to resemble each other. Therefore, areas of the reference
image and the input image which resemble each other (the areas of both images are brighter, or
darker) are positive, and areas which do not (the areas of one is brighter and the other is darker) are
negative.
- Correlation formula = { A ÷ B x C } x 10000
A = NΣ (I x T) — (ΣI) x (ΣT): Correlation between input image and reference image
B = NΣ (I x I) — (ΣI) x (ΣI): Correlation between input images
C = NΣ (T x T) — (ΣT) x (ΣT): Correlation between reference images
(N: Area of reference image, T: Density of reference image, I: Density of input image)
[O]
Ë Object identification and numbering function (labeling)
Object identification and numbering (labeling) is a process for locating separate object and assigning
serial numbers (labels) one at a time in a binary image. By this process, multiple objects in the same
binary image can be handled separately or as a group.
Binary
conversion
3
G
4
Object
identifi1
cation
(in order of
scanning)
3
2
Island
Object identification 4
(in order of area)
2
Island
1
[P]
Ë Partial CCD reading
The "partial CCD reading" technique reads only that part of the CCD which contains the object needed for
image processing. This can shorten the data transfer time from the CCD camera to the image memory.
To read the entire CCD image (480 horizontal lines) takes approximately 33 ms. With the partial reading
technique (e. g.: 120 horizontal lines) can take only 25 % of the time to read the entire image.
The IV-S30 can automatically determine the width of the partial image window. You can change back and
forth between reading the whole image and a partial image.
120
480
Whole image reading Partial image reading
512
512
Ë Pixel
On the CCD, the electrically charged elements are in close proximity, arranged in a matrix (480 lines in
vertical direction, 512 rows in horizontal direction). One element is equivalent to one pixel.
G-8
Glossary
Ë Progressive scan
- See "Full pixel reading."
[R]
Ë Random shutter function
This function allows the CCD camera shutter operation to be triggered when even an object to be measured reaches a specified position in the camera's field of view.
In order to make a partial reading of the CCD image at high speed, the IV-S30 is equipped with the
detection function described above with the works just like a proximity sensor to trigger the CCD. A
proximity sensor can also be connected to the system.
Ë Resolution
The CCD in the IV-S30 contains 512 pixels horizontally and 480 pixels vertically. If it takes a full picture,
the resolution will be X/512 and Y/480.
[S]
Ë Search area
A portion of the target image to be compared with the reference image, using the gray scale search
function.
Ë Search pixel
The relationship between detection precision and search speed, and also between pixel contraction
(reduce the number of pixels in the image that must be searched) and search speed, is shown below:
- DETECTION PRECISION: High speed + [STANDARD-HIGH] _ Low speed
- PIXEL CONTRACTION: High speed + [3 - 2 - 1] _ Low speed
Search speed
Ë Setting window boundaries (enable/disable)
This function enables and disables the labeling (object identification) of binary images located that cross
over the window frame boundary.
2
1
Window
Labeling
(Enable
Binary
window
conversion
boundaries)
Labeling
(Disable window
boundary)
1
2
G-9
3
4
Images 1 and 3 cross over the
window frame edges and are
measured together with the
areas outside the window frame
edges.
Condition: Labeling (in order they are scanned)
G
Glossary
Ë Shading correction
The process used to remove uneven gray areas (light level) from an image is called a shading
correction. The figures below illustrate the principle of the shading correction. The new image has the
areas of uneven brightness subtracted from it to produce a corrected image.
=
÷
New image
Uneve areas of brightness
Corrected image
Ë Smoothing
- See "Space filter"
Ë Space filter
Space filter includes various image manipulation processes that create more readable images by
removing noise and distortion in the image data. And, by extracting or emphasizing certain image
features, it is easier to evaluate or identify target objects by converting the images into standard
patterns.
In the IV-S30, you can select a "smoothing (average, center)," "edge emphasis," "edge extraction,"
"horizontal edge," and "vertical edge."
Item
Contents
- Display smooth images with
decreased noise.
- Used to eliminated surface
flaws and unevenness in the
reflected light caused by
- Specify the average pixel gray
protrusions or dents.
level from the surrounding 3 x 3 area.
- This type of smoothing
- Since noise elements are included in the
(averaging) is faster than the
average, the noise will affect the output.
median smoothing.
- Display images with sharp boundaries between brighter and darker areas.
- Used to stabilize and create a binary outline around unclear objects.
- Display images after extracting and
clarifying the boundaries between the
brighter and darker areas.
- Used to measure objects with
- Horizontal edge extraction: Display only
low contrast.
the horizontal boundaries of an object.
- Vertical edge extraction: Display only the
vertical boundaries of an object.
- Specify the median pixel gray level from
Smoothing the surrounding 3 x 3 area.
(center) - Since noise elements are difficult to
select, they will not affect the output.
Smoothing
(average)
G
Edge
emphasis
Edge
extraction
Horizontal
edge
Vertical
edge
G-10
Glossary
Ë Sub pixel, pixel
Refers to the pixel precision level to be used with the gray scale search function.
- A "pixel" is one picture element (DTECT PRECISION: STANDARD (detection precision: standard) in
case of the IV-S30). "Sub pixel" refers to a unit smaller than a single pixel (DTECT PRECISION: HIGH
(detection precision: high) for 1/10 pixel in case of the IV-S30).
(High precision)
Search coordinates use a
sub pixel level of precision
0
(Standard)
Search coordinates use
a pixel level of precision
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Degree of match
Reference image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Degree of match
[T]
Ë Threshold value
The criteria used for binary conversion of a gray scale image. If an area of the image is lighter than this
threshold value, it is converted to 1. If an area of the image is darker than the threshold value, it is
converted to 0.
Ë Threshold value setting
The IV-S30 treats the "areas darker than the lower limit value" or "brighter than the upper limit value"
as "black." It treats that the areas between the upper limit value and lower limit value as "white."
However, if the white-black reverse function is enabled, conversion to white/black will be reversed.
Normally, if you want to use only one threshold value for binary conversion, set the upper limit value
to "255." Then you only need to adjust the lower limit value to a threshold value that works for our
application.
Threshold value B
Binary conversion
(Upper limit = 255, lower limit = A)
Threshold value A
B
Binary conversion
(Upper limit = 255, lower limit = A)
(Captured image)
Binary conversion
(upper limit = A,
lower limit = B)
(Threshold value)
255
White
Lower
limit A
(Threshold value)
255
Black
Upper
limit A
White
Lower
limit B
Black
0
G-11
Black
0
(Threshold value)
255
A
White
Lower
limit B
0
Black
G
Glossary
( Example for adjustment )
An example of adjustment is shown below, using a white object on a black background. When
the dotted line in the window is converted to a binary image, if the lower limit is set higher, the
black part in the binary image will become larger. If the lower limit is set lower, the white part
will become larger. Increase and decrease the lower limit value, find the value at which the
white part in the binary image starts growing and the value at which the black part starts
growing. Then set the lower limit at the value halfway between these points. This will ensure
reliable operation.
Black
Inspection image
The size of the white area changes
depending on the threshold value setting.
As the value increases,
the black part grows larger.
255
Lower limit threshold
White
0
Stable range *
White
As the value decreases,
the white part grows larger.
Horizontal coordinate
of the dotted line
Changing the lower limit threshold value
* If the stable range in the lower limit threshold
value is less than 20, (actual measurement)
measurement errors may occur.
[W]
Ë Window
The IV-S30 captures images using CCDs, which are the light sensitive elements in the camera. The IVS30 may capture more than one target image to be measured for image processing, and it may capture images not required for measurement. In these cases, a window is used to pick out just the desired target for measurement. The area inside the window will contain the object to be measured and
the areas outside the window will be ignored.
Object to be measured
Window
G
Ë γ positive correction
Used when the mid gray level is too low.
Output image gray level
255
Input image gray level
255
Ë γ negative correction
Used when the mid gray level is too high.
255
Output image gray level
[γ]
Objects outside the designated
measurement area
Input image gray level
255
G-12
Appendix
Appendix 1: Commercially available peripheral devices
Described below for your reference are peripheral devices needed to build a system around the IVS30. (Items handled by SHARP are listed on the next page.)
(1) Lighting equipment
Supplier
Address
3-1-14, Jingumae, Shibuya Ku, Tokyo, 150Moritex Corporation
0001
1-17-1, Toranomon, Minato Ku, Tokyo, 105Nippoin-PI
000
6-1, 3 Chome, Kamifukuoka, Kamifukuoka
Dentsu Sangyo Co., Ltd
City, Saitama, 356-0004
Hayashi Watch-Works Co., 1-28-3, Kita Otshuka, Toshima Ku, Tokyo,
Ltd., Special Item Department 170-000
(2) Lens (mirror barrel)
Supplier
Address
3-1-14, Jingumae, Shibuya Ku, Tokyo, 150Moritex Corporation
0001
12-17, 4 Chome, Yayoi Cho, Nakano Ku,
Seiwa Optical Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Tokyo, 164-0013
Asahi Precision Co., Ltd., 1-21, 1 Chome, Shirako, Wako City, Saitama
Optical machine Department 351-0101
2-15-13, Tsukishima, Chuo ku, Tokyo,104CBC Co., Ltd.
0052
Tamuron Co., Ltd., Special 1385, Hasunuma, Ohmiya City, Saitama, 330Item Sales Department
0015
Canon Sales Co., Ltd., Optical 2-13-29, Minato Minami, Minato Ku, Tokyo,
Lens Sales Department
108-0072
(3) Optical filter
Supplier
Address
Sakai Glass Engineering Co.,
2-3-6, Sengoku, Koto Ku, Tokyo ,135-0015
Ltd., Optic Department
Appendix-1
Phone
03-3401-9711
03-3504-3321
0492-64-1391
03-3918-5237
Phone
03-3401-9711
03-3383-6301
048-466-8801
03-3536-4766
048-684-9129
03-3740-3388
Phone
03-3647-6031
App.
Ë Table of standard items related to the IV-S30 handled by SHARP
SHARP's
article Nbr.
IV-1A0101
IV-1A0102
IV-1A0103
IV-1A0104
IV-1A0105
IV-1A0106
IV-1A0107
IV-1A0201
IV-1A0301
IV-1A0302
IV-1A1101
IV-1A1102
IV-1A1103
IV-1A1301
IV-1A1302
IV-2A0101
IV-2A0102
IV-2A0103
IV-2A0201
IV-2A0202
IV-2A0203
IV-2A0204
IV-2A0301
IV-2A0302
IV-2A0401
App
Moritex's article Nr.
ML-0614
ML-0813
ML-1214
ML-2514
ML-3514
ML-5018
ML-7527
ML-EXR
MIML1-65D
MIML2-65D
ML17-07516
ML17-1520
ML17-2431
MML1-65D-CM1
MML2-65D-CM1
MHF-H50LR
MHF-D100LR
MHF-150L
LM-50
LM-100
LM-150
LM-150C
MRG31-1500S
MRG48-1500S
MSG4-1100S
IV-2A0701
MPP60-1500S
IV-2A0901
KA-03
Item name
CCTV lens
CCTV lens
CCTV lens
CCTV lens
CCTV lens
CCTV lens
CCTV lens
Close up ring
Telecentric lens MY
Telecentric lens
CCTV lens
CCTV lens
CCTV lens
Telecentric lens
Telecentric lens
Halogen light source
Halogen light source
Halogen light source
Halogen lamp
Halogen lamp
Halogen lamp
Halogen lamp
Ring light guide
Ring light guide
Straight light guide
Surface illuminating
light guide
Crystal adapter
The items listed above are all Moritex products.
Appendix-2
Specifications
C mount
f = 6 mm
C mount
f = 8 mm
C mount
f = 12 mm
C mount
f = 25 mm
C mount
f = 35 mm
C mount
f = 50 mm
C mount
f = 75 mm
A set of 7 intermediate rings
C mount
1x
C mount
2x
φ17 mm mount f = 7.5 mm
φ17 mm mount f = 15 mm
φ17 mm mount f = 24 mm
φ17 mm mount 1x
φ17 mm mount 2x
50 W
100 W
150 W
12 V, 50 W
12 V, 100 W
12 V, 150 W (high luminous)
12 V, 150 W (long life)
φ 31 x 1500 mm
φ 48 x 1500 mm
φ 4 mm, 1100 mm
60 x 60 mm, 1500 mm
Needed when the IV-2A0701 is
used with an IV-2A0102
Alphabetical Index
[1,2…]
1-point search ................................................................................................................................... 7-13
2-point search ................................................................................................................................... 7-13
[A]
ADJ-CONTRAST (adjust contrast) ..................................................................................................... 7-3
ALL-INIT (initialize all) ...................................................................................................................... 7-29
AUX-COND (auxiliary conditions) ....................................................................................................... 4-3
AUX-EVAL. (auxiliary evaluation) ....................................................................................................... 7-3
Adjustment of image brightness ......................................................................................................... 7-4
Area filter ........................................................................................................................................... G-1
Area measurement by binary conversion ........................................................................................... 1-7
Area measurement by binary conversion (operation examples) ...................................................... 9-10
Arrangement of the square pixels ...................................................................................................... G-1
Artifact processing ............................................................................................................................. G-1
[B]
BGA/CSP inspection .......................................................................................................................... 1-9
Backlighting ........................................................................................................................................ 5-1
Basic system configuration ................................................................................................................. 3-1
Binary image ...................................................................................................................................... G-1
Binary image display ........................................................................................................................ 7-10
Binary processing .............................................................................................................................. G-2
[C]
Cable to connect with the controlle ..................................................................................................... 4-5
C mount ............................................................................................................................................. G-2
CCD (charge capture device) ............................................................................................................ G-2
CCD camera ....................................................................................................................................... 8-2
CCD trigger ........................................................................................................................................ G-2
CHG-TYPE ......................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Camera ............................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Camera (IV-S30C1) ............................................................................................................................ 4-1
Camera angle ................................................................................................................................... 5-13
Camera cable (IV-S30KC3 to 7) ......................................................................................... 4-6, 5-25, 8-6
Camera converter ........................................................................................................................ 4-4, 8-5
Camera installation distance .............................................................................................................. 5-4
Camera lens (IV-S20L16) ............................................................................................................ 4-6, 8-6
Center of gravity ................................................................................................................................ G-2
Change the Japanese and English display mode .............................................................................. 6-6
Communication setting ..................................................................................................................... 7-27
Computer link .................................................................................................................................... G-2
Connecting a power supply ..................................................................................................... 5-15, 5-37
Connecting equipment to the controller .............................................................................................. 5-8
Connecting to the input/output terminals (parallel I/F) ...................................................................... 5-16
I-1
I
Connection method
Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) ............................................................................................... 5-11
Camera (IV-S30C1/C3) ................................................................................................................ 5-23
Camera (IV-S30C2/C4) ................................................................................................................ 5-27
Camera converter (IV-S30EA1) ................................................................................................... 5-32
EIA camera .................................................................................................................................. 5-33
Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) ............................................................................................... 4-1, 8-1
Controller installation space ............................................................................................................. 5-12
Corrected gray scale search .............................................................................................................. G-6
Controller software version ............................................................................................................... 1-15
[D]
Degree of match inspection ................................................................................................................ 1-8
Differences between controller models .............................................................................................. 1-5
Distance and angle measurement .................................................................................................... 1-11
[E]
EXIST-COND (existence conditions) .................................................................................................. 7-3
EXIST-EVAL. (existence evaluation) .................................................................................................. 7-3
Edge detection ................................................................................................................................... G-3
Edge emphasis .................................................................................................................................. G-3
Edge extraction .................................................................................................................................. G-3
Eliminating binary noise ..................................................................................................................... G-4
Equipment connections .................................................................................................................... 5-15
Existence inspection ................................................................................................................ 7-19, 7-21
Existence inspection (operation examples) ........................................................................................ 9-6
External dimensions
Camera conveter (IV-S30EA1) .................................................................................................... 5-35
Main housing angle bracket ......................................................................................................... 5-35
Expansion and contraction to eliminate binary noise in the image .................................................... G-4
I
[F]
Fillet width .......................................................................................................................................... G-4
Focal length ........................................................................................................................................ 5-5
Freeze image ...................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Full pixel reading ............................................................................................................................... G-5
[G]
Gray scale processing (gray image processing) ............................................................................... G-5
Gray scale search ................................................................................................................................ G6
Gray scale search conditions ........................................................................................................... 7-13
[H]
Halogen lamp .................................................................................................................................... G-6
Hardware specifications ..................................................................................................................... 8-2
High frequency lighting ...................................................................................................................... G-6
High-speed camera ............................................................................................................................ 4-3
Histogram widening ........................................................................................................................... G-6
Horizontal edge ................................................................................................................................. G-3
I-2
[I]
INIT-RAM (Initialize RAM) ................................................................................................................ 7-29
IV-S20L16 .................................................................................................................................... 4-6, 8-6
IV-S30C1 ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2, 8-4
IV-S30C2 ..................................................................................................................................... 4-2, 8-4
IV-S30C3 ..................................................................................................................................... 4-3, 8-4
IV-S30C4 ..................................................................................................................................... 4-3, 8-4
IV-S30EA1 ................................................................................................................................... 4-4, 8-5
IV-S30KC3/C5/C7 ....................................................................................................................... 4-6, 8-6
IV-S30RK1 .......................................................................................................................................... 4-7
IV-60LD ....................................................................................................................................... 5-2, 8-8
IV-09MT .............................................................................................................................................. 8-7
Illuminance ......................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Illumination monitor alarm density setting ......................................................................................... G-7
Image capture ..................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Image display ..................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Image display area ............................................................................................................................. 7-3
Image processing specifications ......................................................................................................... 8-1
Initialization ....................................................................................................................................... 7-29
Installation conditions ......................................................................................................................... 5-1
Installation method
Controller (IV-S31M/S32M/S33M) ............................................................................................... 5-13
Camera (IV-S30C1/C3) ................................................................................................................ 5-24
Camera head ............................................................................................................................... 5-29
Camera body ............................................................................................................................... 5-30
Camera converter (IV-S30EA1) ................................................................................................... 5-34
Installing the camera body ................................................................................................................ 5-12
Installing the controller ...................................................................................................................... 5-13
Interline transfer system .................................................................................................................... G-7
Island ................................................................................................................................................. G-7
[L]
LED lighting equipment IV-60LD ........................................................................................................ 8-6
Lead inspection .................................................................................................................................. 1-8
Leave enough space around the controller ...................................................................................... 5-12
Lens ................................................................................................................................ 5-4, Appendix-1
Lightning equipment ....................................................................................................... 5-1, Appendix-1
[M]
Main axis angle .................................................................................................................................. G-7
Main interface cable ........................................................................................................................... 4-5
Mask window ..................................................................................................................................... G-7
Measurement triggering .................................................................................................................... 7-25
Menu configuration ............................................................................................................................. 6-3
Message display ................................................................................................................................. 7-8
Method for selecting the menu configuration ...................................................................................... 6-4
Micro camera (IV-S30C2) ................................................................................................................... 4-2
I-3
I
Micro, high-speed camera (IV-S30C4) ............................................................................................... 4-3
Mid gray level emphasis .................................................................................................................... G-7
Monochrome monitor (IV-09MT) ........................................................................................................ 8-7
Multiple degree of match inspection ................................................................................................. 1-13
Multiple positions measurement ....................................................................................................... 1-12
[N]
Normalization correlation ................................................................................................................... G-8
[O]
OPS-CND (operation conditions) ....................................................................................................... 7-3
Object counting by binary conversion ............................................................................................... 1-10
Object identification (labeling) by binary conversion ........................................................................ 1-10
Object identification and numbering function (labeling) ..................................................................... G-8
Operation examples ........................................................................................................................... 9-1
Operation screen ................................................................................................................................ 7-1
Operations menu lock ......................................................................................................................... 6-6
Optical filter ............................................................................................................................ Appendix-1
I
[P]
PC specifications ................................................................................................................................ 8-2
POSI-COND (position conditions) ...................................................................................................... 7-3
POSI-EVAL (position evaluation) ....................................................................................................... 7-3
Part names and functions ................................................................................................................... 4-1
Partial CCD reading ........................................................................................................................... G-8
Pattern display .................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Pixel ................................................................................................................................................... G-8
Pixel (sub pixel) ................................................................................................................................. G-8
Point measurements ........................................................................................................................... 1-9
Positional deviation measurement ...................................................................................................... 1-7
Positional deviation measurement (operation examples) ................................................................. 9-15
Positioning ............................................................................................................................... 7-14, 7-16
Positioning measurement (operation examples) ................................................................................ 9-2
Power on setting menu ....................................................................................................................... 6-6
Precautions for use ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
Product configuration ................................................................................................................... 3-1, 3-3
Progressive scan ............................................................................................................................... G-9
[R]
Random shutter function ................................................................................................................... G-9
Reflective lighting ............................................................................................................................... 5-1
Remote keypad .................................................................................................................................. 4-7
Resolution ................................................................................................................................... 5-4, G-9
Result output .................................................................................................................................... 7-26
[S]
SAVE .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
SEL-CAMERA (select camera) .................................................................................................... 7-3,7-5
SHUTTER ........................................................................................................................................... 7-3
I-4
SYS-CND (system conditions) ........................................................................................................... 7-3
Saving data ....................................................................................................................................... 7-26
Search area ....................................................................................................................................... G-9
Search pixel ....................................................................................................................................... G-9
Self-diagnosis ................................................................................................................................... 7-30
Setting and operating procedures ...................................................................................................... 6-1
Setting object types .......................................................................................................................... 7-11
Setting procedures ............................................................................................................................. 7-6
Setting the evaluation conditions
Positioning ................................................................................................................................... 7-17
Existence inspection .................................................................................................................... 7-22
Setting the measurement conditions
Positioning ................................................................................................................................... 7-14
Existence inspection .................................................................................................................... 7-19
Setting the positioning conditions ..................................................................................................... 7-13
Setting the shutter speed .................................................................................................................. 7-12
Setting the system time .................................................................................................................... 7-30
Shading correction ........................................................................................................................... G-10
Shutter speed ..................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Simplified menu configuration ............................................................................................................ 6-3
Simplified menu operation .................................................................................................................. 7-1
Simplified menu (operation examples) ............................................................................................... 9-2
Simplified menus ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
Smoothing (median, average) ......................................................................................................... G-10
Software version of the controllers ..................................................................................................... 1-5
Space around the controller ............................................................................................................... 5-9
Space filter ....................................................................................................................................... G-10
Specifications ..................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Specify the computer link conditions ................................................................................................ 7-28
Specify the system conditions .......................................................................................................... 7-27
Standard camera (IV-S30C1) ............................................................................................................. 4-2
Standard menu ................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Standard menu (operation examples) .............................................................................................. 9-10
Standard menu configuration ............................................................................................................. 6-3
Sub pixel, pixel ................................................................................................................................ G-11
Support tools ...................................................................................................................................... 8-5
Support tools available on the market ................................................................................... Appendix-1
System configuration .......................................................................................................................... 3-1
System configuration examples .......................................................................................................... 3-4
[T]
Threshold value ............................................................................................................................... G-11
Threshold value setting .......................................................................................................... 7-21, G-11
Through image ................................................................................................................................... 7-4
[U]
Upgrade details (controller) ................................................................................................................ 1-5
I-5
I
[V,W]
Vertical edge ...................................................................................................................................... G-3
Window ............................................................................................................................................ G-12
Wiring wethod
Camera converter (IV-S30EA1) ................................................................................................... 5-37
Connection for communications connector (controller) ....................................................... 5-20. 5-22
Input/output terminals of controller ............................................................................................... 5-16
Power supply to controller ............................................................................................................ 5-15
[γ]
γ positive/negative correction ........................................................................................................... G-12
I
I-6